You are on page 1of 275

Gutor PxW

OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE


INSTRUCTIONS

Client: Volta LLC


1616 Gears Rd
Houston, TX 77067 — U.S.A.
P.O. No.: 48652

Project name: EXTERRAN UPS System

Applicable for:
Type designation TAG (Item) No. Our Reference No.
Gutor PEW 1030-125/240-EN 30kVA 1φ UPS 1150079001-01…1150079001-02
Gutor PEW 1030-125/240-EN 30kVA 1φ UPS 1150079002-01…1150079002-02

Rev. Description of change Original document #: 7RA9403GB Issued Validated Approved Date
01 First edition mp CHN LUS 15-06-29

Please note:
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means — electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording — for whatever reason, without the explicit written
permission of GUTOR Electronic LLC

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 1 / 3


OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Document Index
Here only revisions of descriptions in this «Operating & Maintenance Instructions» are updated
(Schematic diagrams, Parts lists, Battery documentation and Customer specific
documentation are excluded).
It is the responsibility of the client to exchange documentation in this «Operating & Maintenance
Instructions».

DOCUMENTS to Gutor PEW 1030-125/240-EN


00 COVER SHEET / DOCUMENT INDEX
4A-1150079001/20GB Rev. 01 Cover sheet (7RA9403GB)
4A-1150079001/20GB Rev. 01 Document Index
01 GENERAL INFORMATION
7RA9017GB Rev. 06 General Information
7RA9408GB Rev. 02 General System Principle and Description of Component
02 SAFETY REGULATIONS
7RA9020GB Rev. 05 Safety Regulations
4A-1150079001/20GB Rev. 01 UL-Label for Fuses
03 SYSTEM DATA
1150079001 Single-Line Diagram
4A-1150079001/23GB Rev. 01 Technical Data (7RA9021GB)
7RA9023GB Rev. 05 Functional Description
04 PACKING — TRANSPORT — INSTALLATION
7RA9072GB Rev. 09 Packing — Unpacking — Storage: Air / Oversea Transport
7RA9074GB Rev. 02 Transport of the System without Packing
7RA9075GB Rev. 06 Erection — Installation
05 DISPLAY — OPERATING AND INDICATING ELEMENTS
7RA9413GB Rev. 02 Display and Parameter Settings
4A-1150079001/20GB Rev. 01 Operating and Indicating Elements (7RA9077GB)
06 COMMISSIONING
1150079001 Single-Line Diagram
7RA9118GB Rev. 05 Starting — Switching Over — Stopping of Single Systems
4A-1150079001/20GB Rev. 01 Commissioning (7RA9121GB)
07 MAINTENANCE
7RA9090GB Rev. 06 Maintenance
7RA9091GB Rev. 02 Replacement of Components and Parts
7RA9092GB Rev. 05 Service — Training — Contact Addresses
08 TROUBLE-SHOOTING
4A-1150079001/20GB Rev. 01 Trouble-Shooting (7RA9093GB)
09 TEST DOCUMENTATION

10 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS / PARTS LIST / SPARE PARTS LIST


1150079001/00 Schematic Diagrams
1150079001/50 Customer Parts List
11 BATTERY DOCUMENTATION
Battery Manufacturer's Installation and Operating Instructions

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 2 / 3


OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Document Index

DOCUMENTS to Gutor PEW 1030-125/240-EN


12 CUSTOMER-SPECIFIC DOCUMENTATION / DECLARATIONS
Declaration of Conformity

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 3 / 3


.
.
.

ÍÛÎÊ×ÝÛ ‰ ÌÎß×Ò×ÒÙ ‰ ÝÑÒÌßÝÌ ßÜÜÎÛÍÍÛÍ Page 7 / 7 7RA9092GB: Rev.04

NORTH AND SOUTH AMERICA:


GUTOR Electronic LLC
12121 Wickchester Lane, Suite 400
Houston, Texas 77079, USA
P 281 588 2145
F 859 962 4593
gutor-service-us@schneider-electric.com

MIDDLE EAST:

CHAPTER 1
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Villa No.2, Defence Road,St.11,
Behind Gava Hotel,
P.O.Box 29580, Abu Dhabi, U.A.E.
P +971 (0)2 443 89 93
F +971 (0)2 443 89 92
gutor-service-ae@schneider-electric.com

GENERAL INFORMATION
SAUDI ARABIA:
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Middle East Commercial Complex
AL-Khobar 31952
P.O.Box. 79575, Saudi Arabia
P +966 (0)3 864 9667
F +966 (0)3 864 9062
gutor-service-sa@schneider-electric.com

RUSSIA
The GUTOR by Schneider Hotline number is: 8-800-200-6446

Please dial 0 for technical consultation, then the Customer Care Center specialist will connect you
to GUTOR by Schneider engineer.

The hotline is open Monday to Friday 8am – 6 pm (Outside business hours please call our GUTOR
Hotline in Switzerland: +41 56 437 6263)

© GUTOR Electronic LLC CH-5430 Wettingen Switzerland


Gutor PxW
General Information

Contents:
1.  PREFACE ...................................................................................................................................................... 2 
2.  GENERAL...................................................................................................................................................... 2 
3.  DESIGNATION OF THE PRODUCTS .......................................................................................................... 4 
4.  STANDARDS APPLIED, CONFORMITY ...................................................................................................... 6 
4.1  EU Conformity ....................................................................................................................................... 6 
4.2  Use According To Destination ............................................................................................................... 7 

Rev. General Information of change Original document #: 7RA9017GB Issued Validated Approved Date
06 New design mp MDR LUS 13-08-22

Please note:
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means — electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording — for whatever reason, without the explicit written
permission of GUTOR Electronic LLC

7RA9017GB: Rev.06 Page 1 / 7


General Information

1. PREFACE
This operation manual provides information about the erection, installation, commissioning and
operation of the system.

In the case of unsureties or special problems, it is not permitted to take unauthorized remedial
action. In such cases our responsible technical service department must be contacted and the
required information obtained.

All agreements, assurances and legal relationships, as well as all obligations of us, also with
respect to the warranty provisions, shall be governed by the respective valid sales contract which is
not influenced by the content of the operation manual.

In the operation of an electrical device certain parts of the device are necessarily
under a hazardous voltage. The failure to observe warnings and incorrect or
inappropriate use can pose a risk and cause damage to persons and property.

Prerequisite to proper and safe operation of this device are correct transport and
storage, erection, installation and commissioning, as well as careful operation,
maintenance and repair.

Work on and manipulation of this device may therefore only be carried out by
qualified personnel.

QUALIFIED PERSONNEL
are persons who, amongst other prerequisites

 are familiar with the erection, installation, commissioning and operation of the device and of
the system, which is being installed or in which the device is being installed;

 are capable of performing switching operations according to safety standards and are entitled
and authorized to switch the equipment on and off and to isolate it from the supply;

 are instructed according to the standards of safety in the care and use of the equipment;

 are trained in immediate rescue measures (first aid);

 have completed instructions with appropriate confirmation by a instructor of us see


also «Service— Training — Contact Addresses».

Please read this operation manual thoroughly before you perform any
manipulations on the installation.

2. GENERAL
UPS SYSTEMS ARE USED TO FEED LOADS, WHICH
 cannot tolerate any interruption in the supply;
 impose very strict demands regarding the voltage constancy;
 are sensitive to mains transients.

7RA9017GB: Rev.06 Page 2 / 7


General Information

Decisive Features:
Characteristic Features Benefits
Modular and clearly arranged design  Accessible from front and top for repair and
maintenance work
 Easy access to power modules, exchange
possible by one person only
High flexibility with respect to specific customer needs
Microprocessor controlled logic, intelligent real time fault  Increased MTBF (Mean Time Between
analysis by means of built-in recording and monitoring Failures) — easy maintenance
unit
Multifunctional digital indication, by which all  Transparent system operation
adjustments and settings can be made via the  Better control over the system functions
password-protected foil keyboard. Fault and status
indications are also shown on the same display.
Active mimic diagram on the front panel, adaptable to  Become clear and peace of mind when the
customer’s specification system is in operation
Distinction between flashing new alarm and steady  Precise fault diagnosis
indication of reset faults. Storage of the last 250 events
in the memory.
As an option : System integrated communication  Remote and easy system supervision
interface RS232
Independent microprocessor electronics for control and  High integrated control logic, which
monitoring contributes to an increased UPS availability
by the drastic reduction of components and
the omission of internal interconnections.
Redundant PSU’s (power supply units), supplied from  Increased system reliability (reliability of
the AC input side and the DC intermediate circuit (where operation)
also the battery is connected to).
Can be switched in parallel for redundancy or to  Each paralleled unit is autonomous, supplies
increase the power, with regulated load sharing. its relevant current-share and has its own
bypass system. Except from the output
To achieve redundancy or for increasing the system busbar, no common components or central
power, up to 9 UPS modules can be paralleled. The units are required.
extension can be made in different power graduations.  An affected unit would immediately be
isolated from the output bus-bar.
 Active load sharing between the individual
system units.
Redundant components for parallel redundant operation  Guaranteed power supply at all times
(no common failure points)
Fan monitoring  Each individual longlife fan is monitored by
means of a Hall generator (insensitive to
dust) and can be exchanged in normal
operation without danger to personnel and
load.
 N+1 fans
 Dual speed concept for noise reduction and
lifetime increase.
Temperature-compensated battery charging  Maximising of the battery life
Battery testing programme & monitoring unit to show the  Security and clarity about the function of
remaining capacity and the actual back-up time on the batteries
display
Use of the latest semiconductor technology (MOSFET/  optimal regulation of the output voltage
IGBT, sine optimized pulse width modulation)  short-circuit proof
Galvanic isolation of the consumers from the battery  optimal protection for the consumers
High overload capability — 1,5 x I nom. for 60 seconds  The UPS system supplies at normal operation
150 % of load for 1 minute and 125 % for 10
minutes.

7RA9017GB: Rev.06 Page 3 / 7


General Information

Characteristic Features Benefits


High short-circuit energy to blow fuses without mains  Often very decisive for systems installed in
present remote areas (platforms).
 The modular concept enables the provision of
larger standardized inverter transistor
modules to increase the available short-circuit
current without mains present.
 Single phase UPS can blow fuses three time
larger than three-phase UPS of identical
rating.
Stands 100 % asymmetric load (only for Gutor PDW)  Indispensable, if single and three-phase loads
are connected to the same UPS.
Sustained short-circuit proof
Suitable for motor load  Motor load, e.g. from air conditioners is not
affecting the secured supply of the other
consumers.
100 % transformer load can be applied without transfer
to bypass
Nominal load admissible with switched mode power  The most extreme kinds of load for an
supplies inverter are switched-mode power supplies
(SMPS). It is therefore designed to provide
100 % of non-linear load (as per IEC 62040-
3) at any crest factor, supplying the load with
sinusoïdal voltage.
Mains-side static switch without bridging by parallel  no electro-mechanical parts
contactors
Highest reliability
Unit-by-unit expansibility for redundancy or later power
increasement
Halogen-free power cable  Safe working environment
Certified industrial quality classification ISO 9001  Guaranteeing highest product and after sales
service quality levels

SUCH DEMANDS ARE PRIMARILY IMPOSED BY THE FOLLOWING KINDS OF USERS:


 Petro / Chemical Industries
 Power stations
 Industrial systems with special specifications
 Telecommunication equipment

3. DESIGNATION OF THE PRODUCTS


The following information is placed in the device:

NAME PLATE (RATING PLATE)


The name plate (rating plate) is located on the inside of the front door near the door lock. It contains
the following information:

7RA9017GB: Rev.06 Page 4 / 7


General Information

Each additional segregated module (transport separation) includes a partly completed rating plate
without electrical specifications. The module numbering shall be consecutive from left to right.
Additional rating plates may be affixed within the same transport module in order to identify different
functional entities (e.g. different distributions)

EU DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY:

This label (CE-Label) is placed on the name plate

ELECTROSTATIC SENSITIVE DEVICES:

This equipment is an electrostatic sensitive device. Observe


precaution for handling.

ELECTRIC SHOCK:
This warning sticker is affixed as close as possible to the terminals:

All protective covers are provided with this warning level.

Behind this cover are storage capacitors with a discharge time of  5 min.
The following labeL is provided:

7RA9017GB: Rev.06 Page 5 / 7


General Information

CONNECTION DIAGRAM
A connection diagram is put into a schema pocket , mounted on the inside of the front door.

LABEL «RETURN OF PARTS»:


This label contains all necessary information for the return of parts or for contacting our service
department. It is adhered on the inside of the front door near the name plate see also
«Service - Customer Training - Contact Addresses».

4. STANDARDS APPLIED, CONFORMITY


International Standards:
IEC / EN 60950-1 Safety of information technology equipment (IEC 60950-1)
EN 50178 (VDE 0160) Equipment of high power installation with electronic resources
Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) :
IEC / EN 62040-1
General and Safety Requirements
Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) :
IEC / EN 62040-2
EMC Requirements
Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) :
IEC / EN 62040-3
Method of specifying the performance and test requirements
IEC 60146 Semiconductor converters
General requirements and line commutated converters –
IEC 60146-1-1
Specification of basic requirements
Self-commutated semiconductor converters including direct d.c.
IEC 60146-2
converters
Low-voltage fuses :
IEC 60269-2 Part 2 : Supplementary requirements for fuses for use by authorized
persons (fuses mainly for industrial application)
IEC 60529 Degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP Code)
IEC 60947 Low voltage switchgear and control gear
IEC 60085 Thermal evaluation and classification of electrical insulation
Industrial systems, installations and equipment and industrial
IEC 81346-2 products - Structuring principles and reference designations
Part 2: Classification of objects and codes for classes
SN EN ISO 9001:2008 Quality Management System
SN EN ISO 14001:2004 Environmental Management System
OHSAS 18001: 2007 Occupational Health and Safety Management

4.1 EU Conformity
The product mentioned in this manual conforms to the relevant requirements to the appropriate EU
Directive, i.e. that this product meets all relevant EU directives and that it can be sold inside the
European Union without national commercial hindrances.

The EU conformity, which is indicated by means of the CE label on the name plate shall cease to
be valid if modifications are made to the equipment without the approval of our company.

7RA9017GB: Rev.06 Page 6 / 7


General Information

Relevant EU Directives for us are the so-called EMC- and Low Voltage Directives:
 EU Directive on Electromagnetic Compatibility 2004/108/EC
 EU Directive on Electrical Equipment designed for use within certain Voltage Limits
(Low Voltage Directive) 2006/95/EC

EN 62040-1 / EN 62040-2 are the EU harmonised product Standard applicable for UPS systems.

APPLIED HARMONISED STANDARDS:


 EN 62040-1 ....... General and Safety Requirements
 EN 62040-2 ........ EMC Requirements

Our UPS’s comply with the requirements of these standards.

4.2 Use According to Destination


The units described herein are electrical equipment for the use in industrial plants.

Unit with open electric connections are determined for building-in only.

This device conforms to the Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC.

This device fulfills the basic requirements of EN 62040-2. In a domestic environment, this product
may cause radio interference, in which case, the user may be required to take additional measures.

7RA9017GB: Rev.06 Page 7 / 7


Gutor PxW
General System Principle and
Description of Components

Contents
1. GENERAL UPS PRINCIPLE DIAGRAM ....................................................................................................... 3
2. EXPLANATION OF THE COMPONENTS IN THE UPS PRINCIPLE DIAGRAM ......................................... 3
2.1 Connection Field .................................................................................................................................... 3
2.2 System Part ........................................................................................................................................... 5

Rev. Description of change Original document #: 7RA9408GB Issued Validated Approved Date
01 First edition mp LOA LUS 13-09-16
02 One PSU A201 deleted / CB03_Fuse = Option mp KPI LUS 13-11-21

Please note:
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means — electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording — for whatever reason, without the explicit written
permission of GUTOR Electronic LLC

7RA9408GB: Rev.02 Page 1 / 7


General System Principle and Description of Components

Q050
CONNECTION FIELD
Q004 BYPASS
X002 TEST
AUTO
B+/B-

X090 T090
BYPASS Q090 A035
F028
MAINS X004
PEW = L, N, PE
PDW = L1, L2, L3, EN LOAD
N, PE
PEW = L, N, PE
A030 L005 A032 PDW = L1, L2, L3,
N, PE
T001 L001 L002 T002
X001 Q001 F026 F021 A036
MAINS
L1, L2, L3, PE
EA
+
CB02
I U IDC IBatt U I I U E001...
CB03

A202 A201 A055


SYSTEM PART PSU PSU FAN
MONITOR

A071 INTERFACE

A070 CONTROLLER

A024 A025 A076 A073 A077 A078 A068


PARALLEL EXTERNAL FRONT PANEL
COM ADAPTER RELAY RELAY ADAPTER
OPERATION CONNECTION OPERATING
BOARD LCD BOARD 1 BOARD 2 BOARD
P.C. Board P.C. Board OPERATION STATUS LED ALARM
DISPLAY
INDICATION

= Option A024 (only connection), A025, A076, A077 & A078 are mounted in the low voltage section

7RA9408GB: Rev.02 Page 2 / 7


General System Principle and Description of Components

1. GENERAL UPS PRINCIPLE DIAGRAM


see page 2

This description is to be regarded as a «General Description». It does not


contain all customized adaptations !
For the customer-specific configuration see «Single line diagram».

The principle diagram on page 2 is a «MAXIMUM VERSION» and is divided into the following
two main parts:
• Connection field
• System part

These two parts are physically isolated from each other to make service and maintenance work
possible on a safer level.

Depending upon the system configuration, the breakers represented in the principle diagram can be
switch-disconnectors (fuse switch-disconnectors) or circuit breakers and the designation can be
made according to customer's request see «Single line diagram».

2. EXPLANATION OF THE COMPONENTS IN THE UPS PRINCIPLE


DIAGRAM
2.1 Connection Field
Pos. Component Explanation
X090 Bypass mains provide for the connection of the bypass mains: 1, 2, or 3 phases, neutral
terminals and ground, dependent on the configuration and the type (Gutor PEW =
L, N, PE / Gutor PDW = L1, L2, L3, N, PE). For three-phase systems one
common set of terminals for rectifier and bypass mains are possible.
Q090 Option: provides for the isolation of the bypass mains input. The bypass mains
Bypass circuit breaker input has to be protected by means of external protective devices
or Switch-disconnector fuses or MCCB’s in compliance with the Technical specification.
T090 Option: provides for the galvanic isolation between bypass mains input and load. It
Bypass transformer or is also installed in the case of different bypass mains input voltage and
stabilizer output voltage. Instead of a transformer a stabilizer can be inserted.
Q050 3-position Manual With this overlapping (make-before-break) switch it is possible to isolate
bypass switch the «System part» for service or maintenance work.
This switch possesses 3 switching positions:
Auto in this position the load is supplied from the system (inverter or
static bypass).
Test in this position the load is supplied direct from the bypass
mains and the UPS system can be tested without disturbing
the consumers at the safe bus.
Bypass in this position the load is supplied direct from the bypass
mains. The static switch is isolated from the bypass mains. For
a total isolation of the «System part» Q001 and Q004 must be
opened likewise. See also «Commissioning»

7RA9408GB: Rev.02 Page 3 / 7


General System Principle and Description of Components

Pos. Component Explanation


Q050 Option: With this overlapping (make-before-break) switch it is possible to isolate
2-position Manual the «System part» for service or maintenance work.
bypass switch This switch possesses 2 switching positions:
Auto in this position the load is supplied from the system (inverter or
static bypass).
Bypass in this position the load is supplied direct from the bypass mains
and the UPS system can be tested without disturbing the
consumers at the safe bus. For a total isolation of the «System
part» Q028, Q001 and Q004 must be opened. See
also «Commissioning»
Q028 Option: provides for the isolation of the static switch EN when performing service
Switch-disconnector or maintenance work.
In systems with a 3-position manual bypass switch Q050 the
function of Q028 is integrated in the manual bypass switch.
X001 Rectifier mains provide for the connection of the rectifier mains (L1, L2, L3, PE). The
terminals rectifier mains input has to be protected by means of external protective
devices fuses or MCCB’s in compliance with the Technical
specification.
Q001 Rectifier Input circuit provide for the isolation of the rectifier mains input no trip
breaker or switch- function. The rectifier mains input has to be protected by means of
disconnector external protective devices fuses or MCCB’s in compliance with
the Technical specification.
X002 Battery terminals provide for the connection of the battery positive pole (B+) and negative
pole (B-). The battery has to be protected by means of external protective
devices fuses or MCCB’s in compliance with the Technical
specification.
Q004 Option: (3-pole for 400VDC systems). If this option is not equipped an external
2-pole Battery circuit protective device has to be installed. Protective device in
breaker compliance with the Technical specification.
X004 Load terminals provide for the connection of the load (Gutor PEW = L, N, PE / Gutor
PDW = L1, L2, L3, N, PE).
A024 Option: is used when two units are connected in parallel.
Parallel operation p.c. • communication between the individual units, in order to guarantee that
board each unit knows in which operating mode the system is operated.
• Load sharing between the individual units. Each unit takes over the
same proportional part of the actual load.
Only the connection is placed in the «Connection field», the p.c. board is
placed in the «System part».
A025 External connection It is a part of the interface to the environment. Following information /
p.c. board functions are available:
OUTPUT
• Two common alarm relays: 5 secs delay (programmable from 0 to 327
secs)
• Relay for «battery operation»: 30 secs delay
• Relay for «system in static bypass EN»

INPUT
• Battery temperature sensor
• Remote Start/Stop
• Emergency shut down
A076 Option: This interface is consisting of:
Communication • two serial RS232 outputs
interface

7RA9408GB: Rev.02 Page 4 / 7


General System Principle and Description of Components

Pos. Component Explanation


A077 Option: 16 Relays All alarm relays are «fail safe», i.e. in the case of an alarm the relays are
in the volt-free position.
• Rect. mains fault
• DC out of tolerance
• Rectifier fuse blown (Option )
• Battery discharged
• Earth fault DC (Option 1 )
• Inverter fuse blown
• Bypass mains fault
• Overtemperature
• Fan failure
• Power supply fault
• Option 2 
• Option 3 
• Option 4 
• Option 5 
• Option 6 
 These options must have been stated in the order.
For detailed description see description «Display & Parameter
settings» and «Operating & Indicating elements».
A078 Option: 16 Relays All alarm relays are «fail safe», i.e. in the case of an alarm the relays are
in the volt-free position.
• EA inhibited 
• EN inhibited
• Manual bypass On 
• Asynchronous
• Overload Inv/Bypass
• Inverter fault
• Battery disconnected
• Battery operation
• Rect. failure
• EN On
• EA On 
• Inverter On
• Boost charge
• Rectifier On
• Ext. Horn
 These options must have been stated in the order.

For detailed description see description «Display & Parameter


settings» and «Operating & Indicating elements».

2.2 System Part


Pos. Component Explanation
T001 Rectifier input provides for the matching of the rectifier mains voltage to the correct value
isolation transformer for the rectifier, and provides galvanic isolation.
A030 6-pulse Thyristor provides for the conversion of the AC voltage into DC voltage.
rectifier-bridge (A031 = 12-pulse thyristor rectifier-bridge = Option).
The 12-pulse rectifier reduces the repercussion of the rectifier back to the
mains. The 5th and the 7th harmonics are compensated by the 12-pulse
rectifier.
F026 Option: Fuse Power fuse at the output of the thyristor rectifier-bridge.
L001 Smoothing choke provides for the filtration of the DC current.

7RA9408GB: Rev.02 Page 5 / 7


General System Principle and Description of Components

Pos. Component Explanation


L005 Battery choke provides for the reduction of the AC ripple generated by the single phase
inverter in the battery.
CB02 DC- capacitor provides for the filtration of the DC current.
module
A032 Pulse Width (PM Power Modul) with IGBT, dependent on the DC voltage. The inverter
Modulated (PWM) converts the DC voltage into AC voltage.
inverter
L002 Smoothing choke filters together with CB03 the PWM output of the inverter to maintain a low
distortion factor at the output of the inverter transformer T002.
T002 Inverter power isolates galvanically the load from the battery and acts simultaneously as
transformer a part of the filter. The transformation ratio additionally determines the
output voltage.
CB03_ Option: Fuse The AC capacitor module CB03 is subdivided into several sections. Each
Fuse section is protected by means of a fuse. In the case of a failure in one
section, this section will be isolated.
CB03 AC capacitor module filters together with L002 the PWM output of the inverter to maintain a low
distortion factor at the output of the inverter transformer T002.
F021 Inverter output fuse protects the load from a fatal fault in the inverter. In the case of a possible
fatal failure of the inverter the system will change to bypass and the fuse
F021 will be interrupted without loss of output voltage.
A035 Static bypass switch consists of antiparallel-switched power thyristors.
EN The static switch EN is used to transfer automatically the load to bypass,
e.g. at heavy overload or if the inverter for some other reasons cannot
keep the output voltage within tolerance; or manually if the operator has
«Bypass» choosen from the foil keyboard. Automatic or manual change-
over to bypass only takes place when the bypass mains voltage and
frequency is within the tolerance range.
F028 Fuse for the protection of the static bypass switch A035 against short-circuit.
A036 Option: The static switch at the inverter output (called EA) can optionally be
Static inverter switch inserted. For redundant systems with EA a different function exists. If a
EA system unit in redundancy operation attempt to change to «Standby», the
EA opens and the inverter is then in no-load operation — without EA the
inverter turns off.
In systems with higher performance this option can require a system
enlargement.
A201 Internal power supply is supplied from the rectifier mains or bypass mains. This power supply is
a part of the redundant internal power supply system, together with A202
which is supplied from the battery. One of the two internal power supplies
is sufficient to supply the system. In the case of a failure in one of the two
power supplies an alarm is generated on the front panel.
A202 Internal power supply is supplied from the internal DC bus. This power supply is a part of the
redundant internal power supply system, together with A201 which is
supplied from the rectifier mains or bypass mains. One of the two internal
power supplies is sufficient to supply the system. In the case of a failure in
one of the two power supplies an alarm is generated on the front panel.
A055 Fan system consist of:
E001... • fan transformer for matching the output voltage to the fans.
• fans with internal Hall sensor for monitoring the number of revolutions.
• fan monitor, monitors the number of revolutions of each fan. If the
number of revolutions falls below the preset value an alarm is
generated.
A068 Adapter board provides as:
• Connection interface to the Controller A070.

7RA9408GB: Rev.02 Page 6 / 7


General System Principle and Description of Components

Pos. Component Explanation


A070 Controller provides for:
• controlling the rectifier
• controlling the static switch
• controlling the inverter
• monitoring e.g. the voltage, current, alarms
• the communication with the front panel
• indicating of the system state by means of the LEDs on the front panel
• controlling the alarm relays
• the serial communication
• the communication between the individual system units, in order to
guarantee that each unit knows about the operating mode of the other
unit in question
A071 Interface This board:
• contains control fuses and distributes power to auxiliary circuits.
• converts the rectifier mains voltage, the bypass voltage and the output
voltage to a lower standard value for the controller and secures a
galvanic isolation between mains / output and controller.
• converts the DC voltage to a lower standard value for the controller
and secures a galvanic isolation between DC / battery and controller.
• is the interface between the individual control cables of e.g. thermal
switches in transformers and ribbon cables, which are led to the
controller.
• distributes the current of the internal power supplies to the different
modules.
A073 Front panel includes:
• Display unit
• Operation
• Operating status indications
• Alarm indications
For details see description «Display & Parameter settings» and
«Operating & Indicating elements».

7RA9408GB: Rev.02 Page 7 / 7


.
.
.

ÍÛÎÊ×ÝÛ ‰ ÌÎß×Ò×ÒÙ ‰ ÝÑÒÌßÝÌ ßÜÜÎÛÍÍÛÍ Page 7 / 7 7RA9092GB: Rev.04

NORTH AND SOUTH AMERICA:


GUTOR Electronic LLC
12121 Wickchester Lane, Suite 400
Houston, Texas 77079, USA
P 281 588 2145
F 859 962 4593
gutor-service-us@schneider-electric.com

MIDDLE EAST:

CHAPTER 2
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Villa No.2, Defence Road,St.11,
Behind Gava Hotel,
P.O.Box 29580, Abu Dhabi, U.A.E.
P +971 (0)2 443 89 93
F +971 (0)2 443 89 92
gutor-service-ae@schneider-electric.com

SAFETY REGULATIONS
SAUDI ARABIA:
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Middle East Commercial Complex
AL-Khobar 31952
P.O.Box. 79575, Saudi Arabia
P +966 (0)3 864 9667
F +966 (0)3 864 9062
gutor-service-sa@schneider-electric.com

RUSSIA
The GUTOR by Schneider Hotline number is: 8-800-200-6446

Please dial 0 for technical consultation, then the Customer Care Center specialist will connect you
to GUTOR by Schneider engineer.

The hotline is open Monday to Friday 8am – 6 pm (Outside business hours please call our GUTOR
Hotline in Switzerland: +41 56 437 6263)

© GUTOR Electronic LLC CH-5430 Wettingen Switzerland


Gutor PxW, PXP, WxW and SDC
Safety Regulations

Contents
1. TECHNICAL SAFETY INFORMATION FOR THE USER .............................................................................. 2
1.1 Safety Instructions/ Precautions ............................................................................................................ 2
2. WARNING ADVICES / SIGNAL WORDS / IDEOGRAMS / SIGNBOARDS.................................................. 2
3. GENERAL SAFETY REGULATIONS ............................................................................................................ 3
3.1 «Hazardous Voltage» [Voltage > 42,4 VACpeak (30Vrms) / 60 VDC]............................................ 3
3.2 Fire Outbreak ......................................................................................................................................... 3
3.3 General Servicing Recommendations ................................................................................................... 4

Rev. Safety Regulations of change Original document #: 7RA9020GB Issued Validated Approved Date
04 New Design mp LST LUS 13-08-22
05 New Ideograms / 1 Docu for PxW / PXP / WxW and SDC / Precaution " Output breaker" mp LUS BKI 14-02-13

Please note:
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means — electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording — for whatever reason, without the explicit written
permission of GUTOR Electronic LLC

7RA9020GB: Rev.05 Page 1 / 4


Safety Regulations

1. TECHNICAL SAFETY INFORMATION FOR THE USER


This description contains the necessary information for the correct application of the product
described below. It is intended for use by instructed and / or service personnel.

Qualified personnel are technically instructed persons who, because of their training, experience
and position as well as their knowledge of appropriate standards, regulations, health and safety
requirements and working conditions, are authorised to be responsible for the safety of the
equipment, at all times whilst carrying out their normal duties and are therefore aware of, and can
report, possible hazards. [The definition of qualified employees is according to «International
Electrotechnical Vocubulary» (IEV) = IEC 60050].

1.1 Safety Instructions/ Precautions


The following instructions are provided for the personal safety of operators and also for the
protection of the described product and connected equipment.

Hazardous voltage
Failure to observe can kill, cause serious injury or material damage.

♦ Isolate from all AC mains and battery supplies before installation or dismantling work, as well
as for fuse changes or post installation modifications. IEC 62040-1-2, 4.9.3
prescribes: ISOLATE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM (UPS) BEFORE WORKING
ON THIS CIRCUIT
♦ Observe the prescribed accident prevention and safety rules for the specific application.
♦ Before putting into operation check if the rated voltage for the unit conforms with the local
supply voltage.
♦ Emergency stop devices must be provided for all applications. Operation of the emergency
stop must inhibit any further uncontrolled operation.
♦ The electric connections must be covered !
♦ Earth connection must be checked for safe function after assembly !
♦ Since a system output breaker is not in our scope of supply (= option), the end-user has
to make sure, that it is provided in the installation.

2. WARNING ADVICES / SIGNAL WORDS / IDEOGRAMS /


SIGNBOARDS
The following ideograms in the manual and in the device (if available) signify:

Danger:
Used for: Immediate threatening danger
Possible consequences: Can kill or cause grievous bodily harm

Warning:
Used for: Possible dangerous situation
Possible consequences: Can kill or cause grievous bodily harm

7RA9020GB: Rev.05 Page 2 / 4


Safety Regulations

Caution:
Used for: Possible dangerous situation
Possible consequences: Insignificant physical injury. Also possible as
warning against material damage

Notice:
Used for: Possible dangerous situation
Possible consequences: Possible damage of the product or something in its
environment

Important:
Used for: Tips for use and helpful informations
Possible consequences: Not an information which warns against dangerous
or harmful situations !

3. GENERAL SAFETY REGULATIONS

When working inside the device or when isolating parts in the system the general
safety recommendation and the local electrical regulations have to be observed !

For compliance with the various safety regulations the following points which constitute a hazard
are mentioned:

3.1 «Hazardous Voltage» [Voltage > 42,4 VACpeak (30Vrms) / 60 VDC]


The systems contain hazardous AC and DC voltages.

IN CASE OF DOUBT NEVER TOUCH !

As soon as the front door is opened the hazard of contact with parts at hazardous
voltages persists. Any operations inside the system must be carried out by
competent/authorized electrical personnel only. Extreme caution should be
WARNING exercised at all times.

Certain parts of the current circuit are live, even if the system is shut dwon. Before any part is
touched the circuit diagram must be studied and verification must be conducted with measuring
instruments.

3.2 Fire Outbreak

If a fire should break out inside the system, fire extinguishers with CO2 must be
used. Do not inhale vapors.

7RA9020GB: Rev.05 Page 3 / 4


Safety Regulations

3.3 General Servicing Recommendations


We advise that the following rules have to be observed:

ASSIGNMENT OF PERSONNEL:
When working under hazardous voltage do not allow personnel to work alone. A second person
should assist so that in the case of emergency help can be called for.

When working on the battery (measuring, topping up electrolyte) goggles, protective (rubber)
gloves, rubber apron and rubber boots shall be worn. Tools for working on the battery shall be
insulated. Refer to chapter on «Battery servicing».

If safety covers are provided, they are the provision for direct contact protection.
They shall prevent unintentional contact with parts at hazardous voltages. Special
caution is required at all times.

7RA9020GB: Rev.05 Page 4 / 4


Gutor PxW
FUSE Label

indicating:
USE ONLY UL-LISTED FUSES !!

Rev. Description of change Original document #: - Issued Validated Approved Date


01 First edition mp CHN LUS 15-06-29

Please note:
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means — electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording — for whatever reason, without the explicit written
permission of GUTOR Electronic LLC

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 1 / 1


.
.
.

ÍÛÎÊ×ÝÛ ‰ ÌÎß×Ò×ÒÙ ‰ ÝÑÒÌßÝÌ ßÜÜÎÛÍÍÛÍ Page 7 / 7 7RA9092GB: Rev.04

NORTH AND SOUTH AMERICA:


GUTOR Electronic LLC
12121 Wickchester Lane, Suite 400
Houston, Texas 77079, USA
P 281 588 2145
F 859 962 4593
gutor-service-us@schneider-electric.com

MIDDLE EAST:

CHAPTER 3
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Villa No.2, Defence Road,St.11,
Behind Gava Hotel,
P.O.Box 29580, Abu Dhabi, U.A.E.
P +971 (0)2 443 89 93
F +971 (0)2 443 89 92
gutor-service-ae@schneider-electric.com

SYSTEM DATA
SAUDI ARABIA:
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Middle East Commercial Complex
AL-Khobar 31952
P.O.Box. 79575, Saudi Arabia
P +966 (0)3 864 9667
F +966 (0)3 864 9062
gutor-service-sa@schneider-electric.com

RUSSIA
The GUTOR by Schneider Hotline number is: 8-800-200-6446

Please dial 0 for technical consultation, then the Customer Care Center specialist will connect you
to GUTOR by Schneider engineer.

The hotline is open Monday to Friday 8am – 6 pm (Outside business hours please call our GUTOR
Hotline in Switzerland: +41 56 437 6263)

© GUTOR Electronic LLC CH-5430 Wettingen Switzerland


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

V/A/F MEASUREMENTS TO BE READ ON THE DISPLAY

BYPASS / INCOMING
A A
50A/4POL 30KVA
-T090
-X090 -Q090
L1,L2,L3

PE

-S091 VS
BYPASS MAINS
3x480V, 60Hz

150A
3PH, 3W

B V -Q050 B

-P092 BYPASS
UPS V
TEST
AUTO
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

800A -A035
V -F028 -K037 EN
-T100 -X004
100A
-X001 -T001 -T002 L1,L2,N
-Q001 -A030 -L001 -A032 -L002 300A PE
L1,L2
C L3 -F021 C
1x240/120V
PE 60Hz 1PH. 3W
30KVA
30KVA PRI: 240V
SEC: 240/120V
3x480V, 60Hz
MAINS INPUT

-CB02 -CB03
3PH, 3W

V/A A A A V V/A/F

D D

-L005

400A
-Q004

B+,B-
-X002 125V DC
E E

BATTERY
60 x GNB 90G15

F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 UPS 1150079001/00 03 1/ 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

12 PULSE TRANSFORMER
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER ANALOGUE METER 27 UNDERVOLTAGE RELAY
6 PULSE TRANSFORMER
A
A A = AMMETER A
GCB V = VOLTMETER
GAS CIRCUIT BREAKER Hz = FREQUENCY METER 37 UNDERCURRENT RELAY

STABILIZER W = WATTMETER
ACB cos = POWER FACTOR METER
AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER 59 OVERVOLTAGE RELAY

A DIGITAL METER
CHOKE A = AMMETER
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER 51 OVERCURRENT RELAY
V = VOLTMETER
B Hz = FREQUENCY METER B

FUSE DISCONNECTOR SWITCH W = WATTMETER 49 THERMAL RELAY


S SELECTOR SWITCH cos = POWER FACTOR METER
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

LOAD BREAKING SWITCH 25 SYNCHRONIZING CHECK RELAY

CAPACITOR
V/A/F MEASUREMENTS TO BE READ
FUSE SWITCH ON THE DISPLAY ELR EARTH LEAKAGE RELAY
A = AMMETER
C V = VOLTMETER C
Hz = FREQUENCY METER
BLOCKING DIODE
GROUNDING LINK EF EARTH FAULT RELAY

FUSE SCR SYNCHRO CHECK RELAY


VOLTAGE DROPPER RECTIFIER
0.0V 0.8 V 4.0 V

CONTACTOR L1,L2
L3
D TERMINALS INVERTER D
EQUIPMENT CODE
PE
CODE DESCRIPTION
A ASSEMBLIES , VARIOUS BOARDS
BATTERY STATIC SWITCH B SENSOR , FIRE DETECTOR
BYPASS C CAPACITOR , STORAGE DEVICES
TEST F FUSE , PROTECTION DEVICES
AUTO G GENERATOR
I
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE TRANSDUCER H SIGNAL LAMP , LIGHTING
3 POSITION I
E SWITCH K CONTACTOR , RELAY , FILTER E
M MOTOR
P DISPLAY UNIT
EARTH Q SWITCHING DEVICES FOR POWER CIRCUIT
R RESISTOR
S SELECTOR SWITCH , CONTROL SWITCHES
T CONVERTER , TRANSFORMER , TRANSDUCER
W BUS BAR
X TERMINALS , PLUGS
F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 LEGEND 1150079001/00 03 2 / 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Gutor PxW
Technical Data
Gutor PEW 1030-125/240-EN

Contents
1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION......................................................................................................................... 2
2. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION .................................................................................................................. 2
3. GENERAL SPECIFICATION ......................................................................................................................... 3
4. ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION OF ONE SYSTEM UNIT............................................................................ 3
5. ADJUSTMENTS ............................................................................................................................................ 5
6. OPERATIONAL PARAMETERS ................................................................................................................... 6
7. ACCESSORIES ............................................................................................................................................. 6

Rev. Description of change Original document #: 7RA9021GB Issued Validated Approved Date
01 First edition mp CHN LUS 15-06-29

Please note:
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means — electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording — for whatever reason, without the explicit written
permission of GUTOR Electronic LLC

4A-1150079001/23GB: Rev.01 Page 1 / 6


Technical Data — Gutor PEW 1030-125/240-EN

1. SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
One complete UPS system is consisting of:
Pcs:
1 Rectifier(s) / Charger(s)
1 Inverter(s) including Static switch(es) EA + EN
1 Manual bypass switch(es) with 3 switching positions
1 Bypass mains Transformer(s)
1 Batter(y)ies

2. MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION
UPS
Enclosure ....................................................................................... : The UPS is housed in a free-standing,
fully metal enclosed cabinet arranged
for floor mounting.

Arrangement / Dimensions ............................................................ : see drawing: 1150079001/00 Chapter


01

Protection class (according to IEC 60529) ..................................... : NEMA 1


......................................................................... with open doors : IP 20, Operator protection

Painting ........................................................................................... : ANSI No. 61


Inside and Top covering ............................................................ : galvanized

Ventilation ...................................................................................... : Internal fans. Air inlet in the back and


in front below, outlet on the top

Cable entry ..................................................................................... : from top

Terminal size .................................................................................. : see drawing: 1150079001/00 Chapter


04

Weight ................................................... (UPS without Distribution) : 1220 kg

BATTERY
Enclosure ....................................................................................... : The battery is either mounted on a
steel rack or mounted in a fully metal
enclosed cabinet.

Arrangement / Dimensions ............................................................ : see drawing: 1150079001/00 Chapter


02

Weight ............................................................................................ : 2880 kg [6380 lbs.]

Number of cells .............................................................................. : 1 string x 60 cells (1 blocks)

Manufacturer .................................................................................. : EXIDE

Type ............................................................................................... : GNB 90G15

Capacity .......................................................................................... : 608 Ah / 10 h

4A-1150079001/23GB: Rev.01 Page 2 / 6


Technical Data — Gutor PEW 1030-125/240-EN

Autonomy ................................................................................ total : 120 min at Load 25.0 kVA, p.f. 0.8 lag
Ambient temperature 25 °C

3. GENERAL SPECIFICATION
Installation altitude with full rating ................................................... : max. 1000m ASL
With derating of 7% per additional 1000m ................................ : max. 4000m ASL

Ambient temperature range, at air inlet


- for operation (100 % nominal load) ...................................... : -10 °C .... +40 °C
- with derating at increased air throughput ............................. : max. 55 °C
- for storage ............................................................................ : -20 °C .... +70 °C for systems
(for batteries in accordance with
manufacturer data)

Relative air humidity ....................................................................... : ≤ 95%, not condensing

Audible Noise level (1 m height, 1 m distance)


- with Standard N+1 Fans ........................................... approx. : 60...70 dBA (depending on type)
- 100 % redundant Fans ............................................. approx. : 65...75 dBA (depending on type)

Reliability MTBF with Bypass......................................................... : > 200000 h

Functional (performance) test ........................................................ : NEMA PE-1

General and Safety requirements .................................................. : CSA 22.2-107.3 / UL1778

EMC requirements ......................................................................... : FCC Part15 Subpart J Class A

Quality assurance .......................................................................... : ISO 9001

4. ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATION OF ONE SYSTEM UNIT


RECTIFIER
Mains input power ................................................................... max. : 61.5 kVA

Input voltage..................................................................... (3ph, PE) : 3x 480 V AC


- Tolerance — DC in tolerance ............................................... : + 10 / - 10 %
- Tolerance — for function ..................................................... : + 10 / - 15 %

Input current ............................................................................ max. : 74.0 A AC

Input frequency .............................................................................. : 60 Hz ±8%

External protection .......................................................... (gG type) : 100 A AC

Power factor
- at nominal mains and float charge........................................ : ≈ 0,83 ind.
- at - 10 % mains and float charge .......................................... : ≈ 0,90 ind.
- at +10 % mains and float charge ......................................... : ≈ 0,75 ind.

Nominal voltage of DC intermediate circuit............................. max. : 125 VDC

Static voltage control tolerance ...................................................... : ± 1 % (IU-characteristics)

4A-1150079001/23GB: Rev.01 Page 3 / 6


Technical Data — Gutor PEW 1030-125/240-EN

Making behaviour ........................................................................... : Electronic softstart

Efficiency at rated load................................................................... : 93.0 %


Tolerances according to IEC 60146-2

BYPASS MAINS TRANSFORMER


Rated power ................................................................................... : 30 kVA

Input voltage................................................................................... : 480V AC ± 10%, 3 ph, 3 wire

Input frequency .............................................................................. : 60 Hz ± 6%

Input current (at rated power) ............................................ I1 = I3 = : 37.6 A AC


..............................................................................................I2 = : 75.2 A AC

External protection ......................................................... (gG Type) : 50 A AC

Output voltage ................................................................................ : 240 VAC, 1 ph

Nominal output current................................................................... : 125.0 A AC

Short circuit impedance ................. Bypass transformer / stabilizer : 4%

Short circuit current ...............................................................(rms) : 25x output current (infinite low


impedance of the supply source
assumed)

INVERTER
Nominal input voltage .................................................................. : 125 V DC
Input voltage tolerance
- for adherence to the output data. ......................................... : - 15 % / + 20 %
- for adherence to the function. ............................................... : ± 25 %

Input current at load cos ϕ 1.0


at Nominal input voltage ......................................... 100 % Load : 274 A DC
at «Low DC voltage - Warning» .............................. 100 % Load : 327 A DC
at «Low DC voltage - Warning» ............................. 150 % Load : 490 A DC

Output rating .................................................................................. : 30 kVA

Power factor range .......................................................................... : 0,4 ind. .... 0,9 cap.


rated for..................................................................................... : cos ϕ 0.8 lag

Output voltage ............................................................................... : 240 VAC, 1 ph


Output voltage regulation .......................................................... : ±1%

Output frequency .......................................................................... : 60 Hz


Output frequency regulation, not synchronized ........................ : ± 0,01 %

Output current nominal.............................................. 100 % : 125 A AC


short-circuit for 0...100ms ................. 200 % : 250 A AC
overload for 0...1min ......................... 150 % : 188 A AC
overload for 1...10min ....................... 125 % : 156 A AC
overload continuous .......................... 105 % : 131 A AC

4A-1150079001/23GB: Rev.01 Page 4 / 6


Technical Data — Gutor PEW 1030-125/240-EN

Efficiency at nominal load .............................................................. : 88 %


Tolerances according to IEC 60146-2

Distortion factor ........................................... total, with linear load : <4%


............................................................. any individual harmonic : <3%
................. with non-linear load according to IEC / EN 62040-3 : 5%

STATIC SWITCH EN (BYPASS)


Output current nominal.............................................. 100 % : 125 A AC
overload for 0...1min ......................... 150 % : 188 A AC
overload for 1...10min ....................... 125 % : 156 A AC
overload for 100ms ......................... 1000 % : 1250 A AC

BATTERY MCCB (FUSE)


Voltage .................................................................................... max. : 250 V DC

Current ............................................................................................ : 400 A DC

SYSTEM
Overall efficiency ............................................................................ : 81 %
Tolerances according to IEC 60146-2

Max. Heat Dissipation .................................................................. : 5.5 Kw

Auxiliary supply heaters ............................................................... : N/A

Auxiliary supply cabinet light ........................................................ : N/A

5. ADJUSTMENTS
RECTIFIER / BATTERY
Float charge voltage ...................................................................... : 135 V DC

Boost charge voltage ...................................................................... : 138 V DC


...........................................................................time interval : 8h

Total current limitation.................................................................... : 365 A DC

Battery current limitation ................................................................ : 61.6 A DC

Rectifier High DC voltage................................................ Shutdown : 160 V DC

DC Earth fault current .................................................................... : 10 mA

Temperature compensation ................................... Charge voltage : N/A

Battery temperature alarm ............................................................. : N/A

Battery symmetry ............................................................. 0 ... 10 % : N/A

4A-1150079001/23GB: Rev.01 Page 5 / 6


Technical Data — Gutor PEW 1030-125/240-EN

INVERTER
Possibilities Settings
Low DC voltage Warning ......... : . .................................................................... 105 V DC
Shutdown ...... : ..................................................................... 96 V DC

High DC voltage Warning ......... : ...................................................................... 159 V DC


Shutdown ...... : ..................................................................... 170 V DC

Synchronization range ........................... : ±0,5/1/2/4/6 % ............................................. ± 0.5%

Slewrate ................................................. : 0,25/0,5/1/2/4 Hz/s ..................................... 1 Hz/s

SYSTEM
Possibilities Settings
Delay of Common Alarm relay ............... : 0...327 s ...................................................... 5 s

6. OPERATIONAL PARAMETERS
Possibilities Settings
Two languages in Display ...................... : Two of these languages can be
choosen:
CZ / DE / DK / ES / FI / FR / GB / HU / IT /
NL / NO / PL / PT / RU / SE / SK.................. DE + GB

Autostart ................................................. : ON/OFF ........................................................ OFF


Bypass operation ................................... : ON/OFF
Boost charge .......................................... : ON/OFF
Autoboost ............................................... : ON/OFF ........................................................ OFF
Adaptive slewrate ................................... : ON/OFF
Battery capacity Test ............................. : ON/OFF
Battery monitor Test ............................... : ON/OFF
Battery monitor Reset ............................ : ON/OFF

7. ACCESSORIES
COMMUNICATION Doc. N° :
Communication Interface ............................................................... : N/A 7RA9078GB

MODBUS Converter (MOD-LINK), RTU ........................................ : N/A 7RA9199GB

Network Management Card (NMC), RTU ...................................... : N/A 7RA9194GB

Network Management Card (NMC), TCP/IP.................................. : N/A 7RG9032GB

MODBUS Functionality of the Network Management Card


(NMC), TCP/IP ............................................................................... : N/A 7RA9193GB

Profibus «Unicontrol DP - Gutor» .................................................. : N/A

TELE-ROUTE – IEC 61850 in Connection with Gutor UPS ........ : N/A

4A-1150079001/23GB: Rev.01 Page 6 / 6


Gutor PxW
Functional Description
of UPS System with 3-position Manual bypass switch
and Static switch EN

Contents
1. GENERAL EXPLANATION ............................................................................................................................ 2
2. OPERATING MODES .................................................................................................................................... 2
3. NORMAL OPERATION .................................................................................................................................. 3
4. BATTERY OPERATION................................................................................................................................. 4
5. BYPASS OPERATION ................................................................................................................................... 5
6. CHARGER ONLY........................................................................................................................................... 7
7. STANDBY....................................................................................................................................................... 8
8. OFF ................................................................................................................................................................ 9
9. MANUAL BYPASS ....................................................................................................................................... 10
9.1 Manual Bypass at Position «TEST» .................................................................................................... 10
9.2 Manual Bypass at Position «BYPASS» ............................................................................................... 11

Rev. Description of change Original document #: 7RA9023GB Issued Validated Approved Date
05 New Design mp MDR LUS 13-08-22

Please note:
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means — electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording — for whatever reason, without the explicit written
permission of GUTOR Electronic LLC

7RA9023GB: Rev.05 Page 1 / 11


Functional Description

1. GENERAL EXPLANATION
Actuation of «Switches»
Circuit breakers, switch-disconnectors (fuse switch-disconnectors), or changeover
switches, as well as any additionnal «switches» may only be actuated according to
the descriptions «Commissioning» and 7RA9118GB «Starting - Switching over -
Stopping».

Manual Bypass Switch with 3 Switching Positions


The manual bypass offers the possibility of setting the system volt-free when performing work
inside the system. The switch Q050 switches overlapping, i.e. no interruptions at the load when
switching over. The switch consists of 3 switching positions (3 steps):

Explanation to the Sketches


current flow =
energized =

Depending upon the system configuration, the switches represented in the sketches can be circuit
breakers, switch-disconnectors (fuse switch-disconnectors) and the designation can be made
according to customer's request see «Single line diagram».

2. OPERATING MODES
The UPS can be operated in different operating modes, depending on the availability of the rectifier
mains, bypass mains, battery voltage and actual load.

In the following the different operational modes and priorities for an UPS with the static switch EN
are explained:

Operating Mode Section


Highest Priority: Manual bypass switch at position «AUTO»
Normal operation 3
Battery operation 4
Bypass operation 5
Charger only 6
Standby 7
Lowest Priority: Manual bypass switch at position «AUTO»
Off 8
Test / Maintenance: Manual bypass switch at position «TEST» or «BYPASS»
Manual Bypass 9

7RA9023GB: Rev.05 Page 2 / 11


Functional Description

3. NORMAL OPERATION
At normal operation the manual bypass switch is always at position «AUTO».

The AC input (rectifier mains) feeds to the phase angle controlled rectifier via a matching
transformer. The rectifier compensates mains voltage variabilities as well as load deviations, and
maintains the DC voltage constant.

The rectifier supplies the inverter with energy and secures that the connected battery is kept on
standby (float charge and boost charge depend on the charging condition and on the type of the
battery).

The downstream inverter converts the DC voltage by means of optimized sinewave pulse width
control (PWM) into AC voltage and supplies directly the connected load.

Fig. 1 The load is supplied from the inverter

Concerns: Status:
Rectifier mains available & within the tolerance range
Q001 closed
Bypass mains available & within the tolerance range (may be outside the tolerance range)
Q090 closed
Q050 at position «AUTO»
Battery available & within the tolerance range (depending on the charging condition
of the battery — it may be in recharge mode).
Q004(Q005) closed
Rectifier ON
Inverter ON
Static switch EN OFF
Output voltage within the tolerance range

If the supply of the load from the inverter is not secured, due to e.g. overload (> 150% 1 minute,
125% 10 minutes) or a fault in the inverter, the UPS will change over to bypass operation
for further information see section 5: «Bypass operation».

7RA9023GB: Rev.05 Page 3 / 11


Functional Description

4. BATTERY OPERATION
At battery operation the manual bypass switch is always at position «AUTO».

In the event of power sags or failures the inverter is no longer supplied from the rectifier. The
battery which is connected to the DC intermediate circuit is called up automatically and without
interruption to supply the current.

The discharging of the battery is signalled. The battery voltage drops as a function of the duration
and the magnitude of the discharge current. The voltage drop is controlled by the inverter and thus
the UPS output voltage is kept constant.

If the limit of discharge of the battery is approached an alarm is activated. On mains recovery or on
emergency power generation by means of a diesel generator before the limit of discharge is
reached the system changes automatically back to normal operation, if not, the system will change
automatically to bypass operation, if the bypass mains is available and within the tolerance range. If
the bypass mains is not available or outside the tolerance range the system will shut down
automatically.

On mains recovery or on emergency power generation by means of a diesel generator the rectifier
starts up after 60 seconds and will charge the battery, if the UPS system is programmed for
«AUTOSTART» at mains recovery see «Technical data». If the system is not programmed
for «AUTOSTART» it has to be restarted manually see description 7RA9118GB «Starting
- Switching over - Stopping».

Depending on the depth of discharge of the battery the charge current is limited by means of the
battery current limitation.

Fig. 2 The load is supplied from the battery

7RA9023GB: Rev.05 Page 4 / 11


Functional Description

Concerns: Status:
Rectifier mains outside the tolerance range
Q001 closed
Bypass mains available & within the tolerance range (may be outside the tolerance range)
Q090 closed
Q050 at position «AUTO»
Battery available & within the tolerance range
Q004(Q005) closed
Rectifier OFF
Inverter ON
Static switch EN OFF
Output voltage within the tolerance range

5. BYPASS OPERATION
At bypass operation the manual bypass switch is always at position «AUTO».

This system part enables the consumers to be changed over without interruption to direct mains
power supply (bypass mains) under adherence to the specified tolerances. The change-over can be
initiated automatically by a control signal, or manually.

Every interrupt-free change-over, whether automatic or manual is normally only possible if voltage,
frequency and phase relation of the UPS system are synchronized to the bypass mains. Deviations
in the mains frequency outside the specified tolerance ranges inhibit normally a change-over.

Automatic change-over of the load to the bypass mains takes place when the power supply within
the specified tolerances is not assured by the inverters.

If a bypass mains fault occurs in this situation the system will automatically change over to normal
operation if the rectifier mains is available, otherwise a change-over to battery operation takes place
if the battery is available and within the tolerance range (occurs only if the system is manually
switched to bypass operation). Thereby, depending on the programming a short loss of
the output voltage can occur.

Fig. 3 Bypass operation due to automatic change-over. The load is supplied direct from
the bypass mains without disturbing the consumers at the safe bus.

7RA9023GB: Rev.05 Page 5 / 11


Functional Description

Concerns: Status:
Rectifier mains outside the tolerance range (may be within the tolerance range)
♦ The UPS will also change to bypass if the inverter is in current limitation,
due to overload. The power supply of the inverter is not
guaranteed.
Q001 closed
Bypass mains available & within the tolerance range
Q090 closed
Q050 at position «AUTO»
Battery outside the tolerance range (may be within the tolerance range)
♦ The UPS will also change to bypass if the inverter is in current limitation,
due to overload. The power supply of the inverter is not
guaranteed.
Q004(Q005) closed
Rectifier OFF / ON (depending on the cause of the change-over)
Inverter OFF
Static switch EN ON
Output voltage within the tolerance range

If the overload any longer does not exist or a possible error is recovered, the UPS switches
automatically back to normal operation or battery operation.

Fig. 4 Bypass operation due to manual change-over. The load is supplied direct from the
bypass mains without disturbing the consumers at the safe bus.

Concerns: Status:
Rectifier mains available & within the tolerance range
♦ Bypass operation was selected by means of the foil key board
Q001 closed
Bypass mains available & within the tolerance range
Q090 closed
Q050 at position «AUTO»
Battery available & within the tolerance range
♦ Bypass operation was selected by means of the foil key board
Q004(Q005) closed
Rectifier ON
Inverter OFF
Static switch EN ON
Output voltage within the tolerance range

7RA9023GB: Rev.05 Page 6 / 11


Functional Description

6. CHARGER ONLY
Fig. 5
MANUAL BYPASS
Q090 SWITCH Q050
BYPASS
MAINS
BYPASS
TEST
AUTO
F028 STATIC SWITCH

EN

RECTIFIER INVERTER
Q001 F021 LOAD
MAINS
Q004
(Q005)
BATTERY

Concerns: Status:
Rectifier mains available & within the tolerance range
Q001 closed
Bypass mains available & within the tolerance range (may be outside the tolerance range)
Q090 closed
Q050 at position «AUTO» — may be at position «TEST» or «BYPASS»
see section 9
Battery available (depending on the charging condition)
Q004(Q005) closed
Rectifier ON
Inverter OFF
Static switch EN OFF
Output voltage NO voltage (with Q050 at position «AUTO»)

The load is not supplied.

7RA9023GB: Rev.05 Page 7 / 11


Functional Description

7. STANDBY
Fig. 6 UPS ready for switching on

Concerns: Status:
Rectifier mains ) available [at least one of the supplies ) has to be available]
Q001 closed
Bypass mains ) available [at least one of the supplies ) has to be available]
Q090 closed
Q050 at position «AUTO» — may be at position «TEST» or «BYPASS»
see section 9
Battery ) available [at least one of the supplies ) has to be available]
Q004(Q005) closed
Rectifier OFF
Inverter OFF
Static switch EN OFF
Output voltage NO voltage (with qQ050 at position «AUTO»)

The load is not supplied.

7RA9023GB: Rev.05 Page 8 / 11


Functional Description

8. OFF
Circuit breakers, switch-disconnectors (fuse switch-disconnectors), or changeover
switches, as well as any additionnal «switches» may only be actuated according to
the descriptions «Commissioning» and 7RA9118GB «Starting - Switching over -
Stopping».

Fig. 7 Display black

MANUAL BYPASS
Q090 SWITCH Q050
BYPASS
MAINS
BYPASS
TEST
F028
STATIC SWITCH AUTO

EN

RECTIFIER INVERTER
Q001 F021 LOAD
MAINS
Q004
(Q005)
BATTERY

Some components in the connection field as well as elements and


lines can be energized.

Concerns: Status:
Rectifier mains not available
Q001 open
Bypass mains not available
Q090 open
Q050 at position «AUTO» — may be at position «TEST» or «BYPASS»
see section 9
Battery separated
Q004(Q005) open
Rectifier OFF
Inverter OFF
Static switch EN OFF
Output voltage NO voltage

The load is not supplied.

7RA9023GB: Rev.05 Page 9 / 11


Functional Description

9. MANUAL BYPASS
The manual bypass switch Q050 may only be actuated according to the
descriptions «Commissioning» and 7RA9118GB «Starting - Switching over -
Stopping».

9.1 Manual Bypass at Position «TEST»


The position « TEST » can be used for test purposes (repair and maintenance work), e.g. for the
synchronization of the inverter to the bypass mains, or for switching attempts between Inverter -
Bypass - Inverter. Therefore an external artificial load can be connected at the TEST terminal
(optional), which however may not exceed the rated output (load + test load = ≤ rated output).

Check therefore the fuse size of the main fuse at the UPS input (bypass mains) !

Fig. 8 Functional check

Concerns: Status:
Rectifier mains available
Q001 closed
Bypass mains available & within the tolerance range
Q090 closed
Q050 at position «TEST»
Battery available
Q004(Q005) closed
Rectifier ON
Inverter OFF / ON
Static switch EN ON / OFF
Output voltage supplied direct from the bypass mains

7RA9023GB: Rev.05 Page 10 / 11


Functional Description

9.2 Manual Bypass at Position «BYPASS»


For repair and maintenance work or work inside the system respectively the system is switched
volt-free (manual bypass switch (MBS) at position «BYPASS») with the exception of some
components in the connection field as well as elements and lines, which can be energized.

Fig. 9 Repair and Maintenance Work

MANUAL BYPASS
Q090 SWITCH Q050
BYPASS
MAINS
BYPASS
TEST
F028
STATIC SWITCH AUTO

EN

RECTIFIER INVERTER
Q001 F021 LOAD
MAINS
Q004
(Q005)
BATTERY

Concerns: Status:
Rectifier mains not available
Q001 open
Bypass mains available & within the tolerance range
Q090 closed
Q050 at position «BYPASS»
Battery separated
Q004(Q005) open
Rectifier OFF
Inverter OFF
Static switch EN OFF
Output voltage supplied direct from the bypass mains

7RA9023GB: Rev.05 Page 11 / 11


.
.
.

ÍÛÎÊ×ÝÛ ‰ ÌÎß×Ò×ÒÙ ‰ ÝÑÒÌßÝÌ ßÜÜÎÛÍÍÛÍ Page 7 / 7 7RA9092GB: Rev.04

NORTH AND SOUTH AMERICA:


GUTOR Electronic LLC
12121 Wickchester Lane, Suite 400
Houston, Texas 77079, USA
P 281 588 2145
F 859 962 4593
gutor-service-us@schneider-electric.com

MIDDLE EAST:

CHAPTER 4
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Villa No.2, Defence Road,St.11,
Behind Gava Hotel,
P.O.Box 29580, Abu Dhabi, U.A.E.
P +971 (0)2 443 89 93
F +971 (0)2 443 89 92
gutor-service-ae@schneider-electric.com

PACKING - TRANSPORT -
SAUDI ARABIA:

INSTALLATION
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Middle East Commercial Complex
AL-Khobar 31952
P.O.Box. 79575, Saudi Arabia
P +966 (0)3 864 9667
F +966 (0)3 864 9062
gutor-service-sa@schneider-electric.com

RUSSIA
The GUTOR by Schneider Hotline number is: 8-800-200-6446

Please dial 0 for technical consultation, then the Customer Care Center specialist will connect you
to GUTOR by Schneider engineer.

The hotline is open Monday to Friday 8am – 6 pm (Outside business hours please call our GUTOR
Hotline in Switzerland: +41 56 437 6263)

© GUTOR Electronic LLC CH-5430 Wettingen Switzerland


Gutor PxW, PXP, WxW and SDC
Packing — Unpacking — Storage:
Air / Oversea Transport

CONTENTS
1. GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................................... 2
1.1 General Requirements .......................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 General Information of Packaging Characteristics ................................................................................ 2
2. GUTOR VCI PACKING PROCEDURE .......................................................................................................... 4
3. CONSTRUCTION OF THE WOODEN CASES .............................................................................................6
3.1 Construction of the OSB (Oriented Strand Board) ................................................................................ 6
3.2 Construction of the Solid Wood Case.................................................................................................... 6
4. OPTIONAL FEATURES ................................................................................................................................. 7
5. SHIPPING MARKS ........................................................................................................................................ 8
5.1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 8
5.2 Care Marks / Handling Symbols ............................................................................................................ 8
5.3 Alternative Marking Method ................................................................................................................... 9
6. TRANSPORT TO THE INSTALLATION PLACE ......................................................................................... 10
7. UNPACKING FROM THE CASE ................................................................................................................. 11
7.1 Inspection of the Packing after its Arrival at the Storage Place .......................................................... 11
8. Storage ......................................................................................................................................................... 13
8.1 System ................................................................................................................................................. 13
8.2 Batteries to UPS system (if available) ................................................................................................. 14

Rev. Description of change Original document #: 7RA9072GB Issued Validated Approved Date
08 New Design mp AMO LUS 13-08-22
09 New Procedures mp TLI/AMO LUS 15-03-26

Please note:
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means — electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording — for whatever reason, without the explicit written
permission of GUTOR Electronic LLC

7RA9072GB: Rev.09 Page 1 / 14


Packing — Unpacking — Storage: Air / Oversea Transport

1. GENERAL
1.1 General Requirements
The packing must satisfy the following criteria:
1. Protection against mechanical stress and damage:
♦ crushing forces due to stacking (only guaranteed for solid wood cases)
♦ gravitational forces in a horizontal direction
♦ forces arising from vibrational loads

2. Protection against corrosion due to the effects of relative humidity and climatic factors
3. Protection against environmental factors (industrial exhausts, salt in the air, rain, snow, etc.)
4. Suitable for lifting and forwarding equipment (Unit Load Concept)
5. Possible frequent reloading and retransferring
6. Shipment over poor roads
7. Economy of volume
8. Protection of environment when handling hazardous material
9. Capability of recycling

1.2 General Information of Packaging Characteristics


1.2.1 Wooden Cases
According to these requirements all our cases are always:
 completely suitable for lifting and forwarding equipment (Unit Unload Concept) due to 2-way
accessibility (10 cm off floor)
 constructed with base plate made of solid wood (24mm thick) and the top covers are made of
only one part.
 made of solid wood instead of OSB wood whenever the gross weight of the contained goods is
over 2000 kg and reinforced lengthwise whenever the gross weight of the contained goods is
over 2500 kg.
 completely manufactured of debarked and then heat treated wood according to International
Standards for Phytosanitary Measures No. 15 (ISPM 15), an International Phytosanitary
Measure developed by the International Plant Protection Convention (IPPC).

The following IPPC stamp is used to mark each case:

1.2.2 VCI (Volatile Corrosion Inhibitors)


Volatile corrosion inhibitors (VCI) are a type of corrosion inhibitor used to protect ferrous materials
against corrosion, where it is impractical to apply surface treatments. They slowly release
compounds that actively prevent corrosion. A typical application is to protect stored tools or parts
inside bags, boxes or cupboards, one advantage of VCIs being that if the container has been
opened and reclosed, levels of inhibitor will recover.

7RA9072GB: Rev.09 Page 2 / 14


Packing — Unpacking — Storage: Air / Oversea Transport

The main advantages of the VCI packing method are the following:
 faster packing and unpacking process
 suitable for sea, air and overland freight
 if the cases have been opened for checking the goods, the material will be protected against
humidity one more time, once the VCI-foil has been rewrapped around the system. Other anti-
corrosive protection methods with air-tight sealed goods will lose their effect unless the bags
are properly sealed again. This will reduce damages and costs which can occur for example at
customs

• Please read carefully the


operational conditions, which
are fixed as warning notices on
the case!

• If a case has been opened for


test purposes, afterwards, it
has to be completely closed
(into the same condition as
originally packed). Otherwise
the VCI protection could be
detracted.

7RA9072GB: Rev.09 Page 3 / 14


Packing — Unpacking — Storage: Air / Oversea Transport

2. GUTOR VCI PACKING PROCEDURE


PREPARATIONS BEFORE PACKING:

For systems with Rain roof:


If small parts are delivered together with the
system, they are packed in plastic bags (or
cardboard) and placed below the roof. These
bags will be fixed to the roof fastening bolts by
means of cable binders.

Bigger parts are packed in cardboard boxes


and placed inside the cubicle.

For systems without Rain roof:


Where parts are delivered together with the
system, these are packed in cardboard boxes
and placed inside the cubicle.

PACKING PROCEDURE:
STEP 1: The VCI-Foil (pink foil) on the base
of the case is cut several times in
order for possible condensation
water to drain off.

STEP 2: The system is being placed on the


base of the case.

Usually one side of the system is open (due to


transport separation)

All doors has to be opened to equip each


transport unit of the system with VCI-chip
type U
(VCI = Volatile Corrosion Inhibitor)
STEP 3: Every field is equipped with one or
more chips (chip-size = 49x100
cm).

One chip protects a volume of 1m3.


The number of chips is calculated as follows:

Example:
Gross volume is 3m3
Equipment / Material is 1m3
Free space within the case is 2m3
Therefore, two chips are used (they have
to be removed when installing the system)

STEP 4: Doors have to be closed.

7RA9072GB: Rev.09 Page 4 / 14


Packing — Unpacking — Storage: Air / Oversea Transport

STEP 5: The system will be covered with a VCI foil STEP 6: The VCI foil will be fixed on the system
with an adhesive tape, that does not
leave any residue. At the bottom the foil
will be fixed by staples.
Within 24 hours, the anticorrosive will
become active.

STEP 7: The walls and the cushioning corners STEP 8: Package with handling symbols and
are fixed shipping marks

7RA9072GB: Rev.09 Page 5 / 14


Packing — Unpacking — Storage: Air / Oversea Transport

3. CONSTRUCTION OF WOODEN CASES


3.1 Construction of the OSB Case (Oriented Strand Board)
1. The side walls consist of at maximum 2 parts, the front walls consist of at maximum 3 parts.
The base plate is always made of solid wood (24mm thick).
2. The OSB wood thickness is 9 mm up to 10 mm.
3. The wood cover, covering foil and the plywood cover must be concise with the side and the
front walls.

3.1.1 Construction Design of the OSB Case

 Polyethylene edges:
for protecting and fixing the system.
 Cross laths (cross-heads)
are determined by the length of the case
and the size of the system to be packed.
(Only equipped in cases containing small
systems or in case of projecting cables,
etc.).
 Compound foam material
for the protection of the system (only if
required, depending on the case size).
 Floor cross laths
for the distribution of the load outward
(lifting of the case with belts) under each
socket of the system one floor cross lath
is laid (not fixed).

3.2 Construction of the Solid Wooden Case


1. Side walls, face-end walls, and floors are made of Swiss wood. (IPCC Standard)
2. Wood thicknesses 24 mm.
3. Wood cover dry film resist and plywood cover must be concise with the side walls and front
walls.
4. As a rain protection PE foil becomes strained under the cover.
5. The cases are reinforced lengthwise whenever the gross weight of the contained goods is over
2500 kg.

3.2.1 Construction Design of the Solid Wooden Case

The following representations correspond to a solid wooden case (the OSB cases
comprise instead of individual boards whole or max. 3 plates per side).

7RA9072GB: Rev.09 Page 6 / 14


Packing — Unpacking — Storage: Air / Oversea Transport

9 9
4 4

5 5

7 6

2 1

3 3
8 8

Pos. Description Pos. Description Pos. Description


1 Front wall 4 Cover 7 Side skid
2 Side wall 5 Double Cover 8 Floor skid
3 Floor 6 Front skid 9 Cover skid

Pos. Description Pos. Description Pos. Description


1 Side wall 5 Double Cover 8 Floor skid
2 Front wall 6 Side skid 9 Cover skid
3 Floor 7 Front skid 10 Protection foil
4 Cover

4. OPTIONAL FEATURES
If required the following optional features can be provided on customer’s special request:
1. Additional rain protection for OSB cases by the use of PE foil strained under the top cover (the
same method as with solid wood cases) may be employed.

7RA9072GB: Rev.09 Page 7 / 14


Packing — Unpacking — Storage: Air / Oversea Transport

2. Further different variants may be selected to ensure protection from rain, e.g. sandwich covers.
In this case the inside of the cover is provided additionally with twin wall sheet or a plywood
panel. The individual materials can also be combined.

3. For moisture proof packaging aluminium foil vacuumed and sealed may be employed instead
of VCI foil. Instead of VCI inhibitor silica packs will be used

4. Inspection hole with humidity indicator (only in combination with moisture proof packaging)

5. Various color markings (for example colored case corners)

6. Supplementary cushioning (for adverse road conditions)

7. Cladding of cases with diverse protection foils (Kraft paper, Akylux, etc.).

8. Tip Indicator, Shock indicator, etc.

9. Front wall and top cover screwed instead of nailed

PACKING
10. Metal cover for packing list NOTE HERE

(As a standard the packing list is affixed with a waterproof plastic envelope well tacked on the
outside each package)

11. Cases with 4-way accessibility for forklift

5. SHIPPING MARKS
5.1 General
The shipping mark is stencilled with good quality non-fading indelible black ink (for sea freight) or
marked with a securely fastened placard sign (for land and air freight) on two opposite sides (front
and back) of each package.

5.2 Care Marks / Handling Symbols


The standard marking of standard cases is implemented in writing (only symbol 1-3) and according
to the symbols provided in DIN 55'402 on at least two opposite sides of the case. The symbols 1 –
3 as well as 7 are marked on all four sides of each case by default.

The following marking is used as a standard:

SCHNEIDER
XXXXX
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
This side up:
1 The case must always be stored, transferred, and transported in such a way that the
arrow always point up.
Fragile, handle with care:
2 Goods marked in this way must be handled with care and not dropped or tied under
any conditions.

7RA9072GB: Rev.09 Page 8 / 14


Packing — Unpacking — Storage: Air / Oversea Transport

Keep dry:
3 Goods marked in this way also have to be protected from high humidity, they must be
kept under covers when in storage (no unprotected outdoor storage).
Sling here:
4 The symbol indicates only where the sling should be applied, and not the method to
be used for applying it.
Center of gravity:
5 This symbol clearly identifies the center of gravity.
0 Kg stacking load:
6 The plywood and OSB cases are not stackable
SCHNEIDER XXXXXX:
7 This stamp is on each case delivered from us whereby XXXXXX = our reference
number of the system packed therein.

If required, additional markings are made according to the instructions of the client or the packing
company.

Examples:

5.3 Alternative Marking Method


For small cases with limited space for shipping mark application or for large shipping marks, we
strongly recommend and offer to mark the cases with waterproof laminates as the font size of a
stenciled shipping mark would be illegible and therefore not serviceable.

The laminates do get well tacked to each case to ensure that they cannot fall off during handling.

7RA9072GB: Rev.09 Page 9 / 14


Packing — Unpacking — Storage: Air / Oversea Transport

6. TRANSPORT TO THE INSTALLATION PLACE


Check:
♦ the weight before the transport to secure that the equipment can handle the actual weight of
the system.
♦ that there is enough space to transport the system to its final destination
♦ that the floor can bear the load
♦ that the lift can carry the system
♦ what is with the computer floor (double floor)

Movement with lifting and forwarding equipment


Normally, the system is delivered in cases appropriate to the means of transport or on a pallet and
can be transported by a fork-lift or pallet-truck.

Pay attention to the marking on the case !

Striking with lifting equipment


When moving the cases with lifting equipment, the crane slings may be attached only at those
points identified by the chain symbol (symbol G) per DIN 55'402 see the following
example:

The following representations correspond to a solid wooden case (the OSB cases
comprise instead of individual boards whole or max. 3 plates per side)

7RA9072GB: Rev.09 Page 10 / 14


Packing — Unpacking — Storage: Air / Oversea Transport

Sling here:
The symbols indicate only where the sling should be
applied, and not the method to be used for applying it.
Whenever the symbols are at an equal distance from
the middle of the center of gravity, the package will
hang straight if the suspensions are of the same length.
If not, the suspension on one side must be shortened.
Never follow this symbol for packages that have
obviously been incorrectly identified and/or designed.
Doing so could cause the packages to be dropped.

Lifting with a forklift


When lifting and/or moving with a forklift, the forks may only be inserted under the packages
parallel to the floor runners.

Attention to the center of gravity


Attention must be paid to the center of gravity as identified with symbol F per DIN 55'402 when
lifting or driving under the cases in order to avoid having the packages tip over.

Center of gravity:
This symbol clearly identifies the center of gravity.
Reasonably the symbol should only be used on
multiple sides when the center of gravity is off-center in
the package. Application for the symbol on two
surfaces perpendicular to one another would be
sufficient for clear identification.

7. UNPACKING FROM THE CASE


7.1 Inspection of the Packing after its Arrival at the Storage Place
Our products have been packed according the latest state of the art to ensure a damage free and
functional arrival at the final point of destination. Hence, as a rule neither the packing nor the
system within should have suffered any damage during transport.

All boxes, cases, pallets, and other packages must be examined before, during and after unloading
for visible and apparent mechanical damage. If any damage has penetrated the case, or if it is
not received in upright position (look for indication of this on the case), then pictures of the
damaged goods have to be taken without moving it and the necessary detailed remarks have to be
made on the forwarders delivery notice before accepting the goods. Notify and send the pictures to
the responsible forwarder and the supplier immediately, within 24 hours at most.

Severely damaged packing or equipment should be left untouched until the shipper and the
insurance company can inspect it. Records must be kept on all findings.

Any non-mechanical damage found, such as: boxes, cases, or other packages that are wet
through or very dirty, must be recorded and whenever possible kept for a later inspection of their
contents.

7RA9072GB: Rev.09 Page 11 / 14


Packing — Unpacking — Storage: Air / Oversea Transport

Any hidden damages which are only noticeable after unpacking of the goods, have to be recorded
in detail as well and photographs have to be taken as evidence. In case of air freight delivery the
damage report has to be submitted to the supplier within 7 days and in case of sea freight
within 3 days after discovery.

Unpacking of the System


A metallic or plastic envelope is placed on the side wall of the case. In the envelope the delivery
note or the packing list is placed.
Before unpacking the system, take out the delivery note (packing list) and keep it to check that the
equipment is in accordance with the specifications on the document.
In case of any defects the manufacturer should be notified immediately in order to avoid a delay in
the installation of the system.

♦ Unpack the system in a clean, dry storage area.


Example: Solid wooden case Pos. Description
1 Side wall
2 Front wall
3 Floor
4 Cover
5 —
6 Side skid
7 Front skid
8 Floor skid
9 Cover skid

♦ By means of a crowbar remove the cover (4). It is not necessary first to remove the cover skids
(9) — since these are fixed to the cover ( see above picture).

Be cautious not to damage the system packed therein

♦ By means of a crowbar remove the front wall (2) of the case. It is not necessary first to remove
the front skids (7) with which the side wall of the case is fixed to the pallet ( see above
picture).
♦ Now the system can be removed by means of a fork-lift. When lifting the pre-packed system
this has to be made according to the instructions «Transport of the System without Packing»
and the instructions given in this description.
♦ Remove the VCI foil.
♦ Remove eventually delivered parts see picture 1 in section 2 of this description.
♦ Open the front door and examine the interior of the system for any potential damage due to
mishandling of the system during transport. Notify the shipper and the manufacturer of any
such damage immediately. Proceed as mentioned under section 4.1.

7RA9072GB: Rev.09 Page 12 / 14


Packing — Unpacking — Storage: Air / Oversea Transport

♦ If the system is not going to be taken into use right away, put the VCI foil over the system again
to protect it against dust and moisture. If the system is going to be installed immediately
without storage, remove the VCI chip inside the system.
♦ Move the system to its installation place. (Remember, before the final placing mount the
ventilation grids see description «Erection — Installation» section 2.1).

always use gloves while working with VCI

always wash hands and face after working with VCI

8. STORAGE
8.1 System
If the system is not to be installed immediately, the cubicles included in the delivery should remain
in dry storage in their crates and protected against dust. Storage temperatures advantageously
should be between -10°C and +55°C (allowable max. -25°C and +70°C). This also applies generally
to all replacement material for the system.

If the humidity is higher than 95%, or if it is condensing, it is necessary to operate heating facilities
(if existing in equipment) internal the system until the system will be turned on.

GUARANTEED STORAGE PERIOD / STORAGE REQUIREMENTS:


The (inner) packing protects the system against anti-corrosion. However, the duration of the
protection depends on the applied anti-corrosion method and can be taken from the following:

Anti-corrosion measures
• anti-corrosion protection by inhabitation of the corrosive process

Anti-corrosion methods
• wrapped VCI (volatile corrosion inhibitor) film

Function of anti-corrosion protection


• The VCI method works via a vapour phase.VCI molecules evaporate from the carrier material
such as films and saturate the surrounding air. They "cover" the surface of materials threatened
by corrosion. The molecules form a protective film on the layer of oxides that is present on all
metal surfaces and inhibit corrosive processes.

Standard duration of protection


• The system is to be installed within 24 months after packing date and put into operation.

General restrictions
• crate has to be examined after every handling (transport)
• when a damage has to be diagnosed the crate has to be opened and the inner packing has to
be examined to
• when a hole or scratch has be detected the supplier has to be informed immediately (there is no
longer any corrosion protection guaranteed)

Anti-corrosion method specific restrictions


• the metal surface has to be clean, dry and free from corrosion simulating substances
• metal surface has to be free from corrosion before starting the packing process
• crate has to be stored in a closed warehouse hall (dry, cool, protected from sunshine)

7RA9072GB: Rev.09 Page 13 / 14


Packing — Unpacking — Storage: Air / Oversea Transport

End of guarantee
• The anticorrosion protection guarantee of the supplier (i.e. his authorized export packers) ends,
when
• the original packing has to be manipulated, removed or changed by the customer itself or by a
third party
• the sealed inner packing (PE-film / Alu-film) has to be opened
• the VCI film has not been re-wrapped correctly and immediately (e.g. after examination of the
goods are taking out some parts) and the case has not stand after the re-wrapping for minimum
6 hours in a clean, dry and climatic hall.
• the create has not been treated correctly during transportation or intermediate storing

EXTENSION OF THE STORAGE PERIOD:


After expiration of the guaranteed duration of protection the manufacturer must be consulted to
determine the necessary or possible additional precautions (possibly commissioning by the
manufacturer).

8.2 Batteries to the System (if available)


The packing type of the batteries is different and depends on the manufacturer and the battery type.
If the batteries are to be stored for a long time (> ½ year) the means of storage is to be approved
by the battery furnisher, because they are different, depending on the type of the battery.

7RA9072GB: Rev.09 Page 14 / 14


Gutor PxW, WxW and SDC
Transport of the System Without Packing

Contents
1. TRANSPORT: C-RAIL MOUNTED ............................................................................................................... 2
2. TRANSPORT: LIFTING LUGS MOUNTED .................................................................................................. 3

Rev. Description of change Original document #: 7RA9074GB Issued Validated Approved Date
02 New Design mp GA LUS 13-08-22

Please note:
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means — electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording — for whatever reason, without the explicit written
permission of GUTOR Electronic LLC

7RA9074GB: Rev.02 Page 1 / 3


Transport of the System Without Packing

1. TRANSPORT: C-RAIL MOUNTED

CAUTION:
The lifting lugs have to be strained
perpendicularly.

When lifting units with a rain roof IPX1 /


IPX2, the roof has first to be dismounted.

The system can also be transported by a


fork-lift or pallet-truck.

Pay attention on the


center of gravity and
the weight !

70
40

125 C-Rail
5
25

Device socket

Door frame or back cover

The C-rail for the neck straps on the


front and back or the device must
bear out 5 mm

Device socket

7RA9074GB: Rev.02 Page 2 / 3


Transport of the System Without Packing

2. TRANSPORT: LIFTING LUGS MOUNTED


SYSTEMS UP TO 500KG PER TRANSPORT UNIT
The angle of the cable must be at minimum 45°.

SYSTEMS EXCEEDING 500KG PER TRANSPORT UNIT

The lifting lugs have to be strained perpendicularly.

When lifting systems with a rain roof (IPX1 / IPX2), the roof has first to be dismounted.

7RA9074GB: Rev.02 Page 3 / 3


Gutor PxW
Erection — Installation

Contents
1. GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................................... 2
2. INSTALLATION / ERECTION ........................................................................................................................ 2
2.1 IP Protection / Ventilation Grids............................................................................................................. 2
2.2 Placing ................................................................................................................................................... 3
2.3 Cable inlet .............................................................................................................................................. 4
2.4 Parallel Operation Cables for 2 Redundant Systems ............................................................................ 4
2.5 Parallel Operation Cables for 3 to 9 Redundant Systems ..................................................................... 5
3. VENTILATION ................................................................................................................................................ 5
4. CONNECTION / PROTECTION .................................................................................................................... 6
4.1 Earthing of the Cubicle .......................................................................................................................... 6
4.2 Mains Connection .................................................................................................................................. 6
4.3 Backfeed Protection .............................................................................................................................. 6
4.4 Battery Connection ................................................................................................................................ 7
4.5 Earthing of the Battery (For systems with battery) ............................................................................. 7
4.6 Connection of the Load ......................................................................................................................... 7
4.7 External Protection ................................................................................................................................ 8

Rev. Description of change Original document #: 7RA9075GB Issued Validated Approved Date
06 New Design mp RST LUS 13-08-22

Please note:
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means — electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording — for whatever reason, without the explicit written
permission of GUTOR Electronic LLC

7RA9075GB: Rev.06 Page 1 / 8


Erection — Installation

1. GENERAL
The following has to be considered in connection with the installation of the UPS system:
♦ System room
♦ Cable connection / cable interconnection
♦ Losses, ambient temperature, ventilation
♦ Connection / Protection
♦ Earthing of the cubicle
♦ Mains connection
♦ Connection of load / distribution
♦ 3-phase systems with SMPS load (increased neutral current)

In the following sections the general requirements for the installation of UPS systems is explained.

2. INSTALLATION / ERECTION
2.1 IP Protection / Ventilation Grids
Fit the ventilation grids on the front and the back ) of the device socket to the snap clip on both
sides by means of sheet metal screws M5,5 and the corresponding washers see Fig. 1.

AIR FILTERS / GLAND PLATES


Dependent on the degree of protection with which the system was ordered (see «Technical data»
the system can optionally be equipped with additional air filters and gland plates. These can be
pushed in from the front on the rails designated for that see Fig. 1.

If additional air filters and gland plates are to be mounted it is absolutely necessary to
displace the system to its definite place of erection before attaching the
) ventilation grids to the front, since a transport of the system with mounted air filters
and gland plates by means of a fork-lift or a pallet-truck is than no longer possible.

MOUNTING OF THE RAIN ROOF


The rain roof (optional) has to be fastened in accordance with the «Dimensional drawing», if it was
not already mounted in the factory.

When mounting the rain roof special attention must be paid to the fact that
no parts fall into the system. Besides, the rain roofs are not appropriate for
a load from top and the system may also not be lifted at the rain roof.

7RA9075GB: Rev.06 Page 2 / 8


Erection — Installation

FIG. 1 Mounting of air filters and gland plates, as well as fixing of ventilation grids
(front and back)

2.2 Placing

The ventilation grids have in any case to be fixed on the back of the system before
it will be placed to the wall or back to back. see section 2.1.

The UPS system is built in a cubicle with a stable frame. On this frame heavy components such as
transformers, chokes, etc. are mounted. The frame can be placed direct on a levelled concrete
floor.

The UPS system can be placed with the backside to the wall or back to back (but a space of at
least 100mm must be ensured). If possible, preferably a distance of 500mm from the backside of
the system to the wall or between the systems (if these are placed back to back) should be
provided.

Above the top of the system a clearance of 500mm has to be provided to ensure sufficent space for
the air outlet in fig. 2 typical installations are shown.

7RA9075GB: Rev.06 Page 3 / 8


Erection — Installation

FIG. 2 Typical placing of a system

2.3 Cable Inlet


As a standard the cable inlet is from bottom, but optionally can also be performed from top, if this is
stated in the order. In fig. 3 typical cable installations are shown. At the installation the
bending radius of the cables must be in accordance with the Standards.

FIG. 3 Examples of cable inlets (View from the right side)

2.4 Parallel Operation Cables for 2 Redundant Systems


For 2 redundant systems the necessary parallel operation cables are loosely provided in a separate
plastic bag (2 pieces per intermediate connection). These must be attached and interconnected
before the initial start-up of the system in accordance with Fig. 4.

7RA9075GB: Rev.06 Page 4 / 8


Erection — Installation

FIG. 4 Interconnection of the 2 parallel operation cables

2.5 Parallel Operation Cables for 3 to 9 Redundant Systems


For 3 to 9 redundant systems the necessary parallel operation cables are loosely provided in a
separate plastic bag (1 piece per intermediate connection). These must be attached and
interconnected before the initial start-up of the system in accordance with Fig. 5.

FIG. 5 Interconnection of the 3 to 9 parallel operation cables

3. VENTILATION
Attention must be paid to the heat that is to be removed which is generated by the power losses of
the system. The inlet and outlet of air must be ensured, otherwise the system can produce an alarm
due to overheating, or even shut down. Therefore the ambient temperature stated in the
«Technical Data» is to be observed. Alarm indication is given if the temperature of the power
components exceeds the permitted level.

7RA9075GB: Rev.06 Page 5 / 8


Erection — Installation

Objects which obstruct ventilation or which are easily combustible should under no circumstances
be placed on, under or very near the system.

If the system is placed with the backside to the wall or back to back, a space of at least 100mm has
to be guaranteed.

The necessary quantity of air cooling per hour depends on the one side on the total developed
power dissipation, i.e. from the size and number of installed UPS systems, and on the other side on
the possible resp. permitted warming of the cooling air. The permitted warming of the cooling air is
the difference between the admissible ambient temperature (e.g. 30° C) and the incoming
temperature of the cooling air into the room (e.g. 25° C).

4. CONNECTION / PROTECTION
4.1 Earthing of the Cubicle
The system cubicle must be earthed, for which purpose earth bars/terminals are provided inside the
system.

4.2 Mains Connection


The incoming feeders must comply with the general recommendation of IEC or the general
Standards of VDE(D), SEV/HV (CH), or possibly with the additional Standard corresponding to the
local electrical regulations.

The person carrying out the work must be an authorised installation electrician.

The fuse protection and the wire cross section of the mains connection can be seen in the
«Technical Data», however, only if these meet also to the local electrical regulations.

The rectifier mains input and the bypass mains input must be protected by external fuses or
MCCB’s.

4.3 Backfeed Protection


WITH INTERNAL BACKFEED PROTECTION

Risk of Electric shock !

All AC mains supply connections are provided with suitable isolators of the contactor type according
to IEC 60947, to prevent the occurrence of any hazardous voltages at these terminals in the case of
AC mains failure due to backfeed from the inverter operating in the stored energy mode.

All required backfeed contactors in AC mains AND AC bypass path are provided

7RA9075GB: Rev.06 Page 6 / 8


Erection — Installation

WITH EXTERNAL BACKFEED PROTECTION

Risk of Electric shock !

All AC mains supply connections have to be provided with suitable isolators of the type MCCB,
switch according to IEC 60947, to prevent the occurrence of any hazardous voltages at these
terminals in the case of AC mains failure due to backfeed from the inverter operating in the stored
energy mode.

When the backfeed protection isolator is external to the UPS, the type and rating of this suitable
isolating device is specified in the «Technical Data».

For permanently connected UPS where automatic backfeed isolation is provided external to the
equipment, the instructions shall require the fitting by the user of a warning label on all primary
power isolators installed remote from the UPS area to warn electrical maintenance personnel that
the circuit feeds an UPS.

The warning label shall carry the following wording or equivalent

ISOLATE UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS) BEFORE


WORKING ON THIS CIRCUIT

One or more required backfeed isolators are not provided internally and must
be provided externally.

4.4 Battery Connection


The battery feeders must comply with the general recommendation of IEC or the general Standards
of VDE(D), SEV/HV (CH), or possibly with the additional Standard corresponding to the local
electrical regulations. The battery must be protected by external fuses or MCCB’s.

The fuse protection can be seen in the «Technical Data».

4.5 Earthing of the Battery (For systems with battery)


It is not necessary to earth the battery. However, if it is desired the battery may be earthed, but only
if there is an isolating transformer at the input of the rectifier and at the output of the inverter.

It is not allowed to earth the battery if the system is not designed to be


earthed on the battery terminals.

4.6 Connection of the Load


The load cables are to be installed and connected according to the maximum allowable load. It has
to be assured that the connected load does not exceed the maximum rated capacity of the UPS
system and is within the specified power factor (cos phi) ! For three-phase UPS systems it has to
be taken into consideration that the load can be single phase, i.e. the load is connected between
phase and neutral.

7RA9075GB: Rev.06 Page 7 / 8


Erection — Installation

For three-phase UPS system with non-linear loads connected:


Check the neutral current not to exceed the rated ampacity of the
conductor.

NEUTRAL CONDUCTOR AT THE OUTPUT


It is recommended to connect the output neutral to earth.
It might be necessary to install a bypass transformer with galvanic isolation to permit a connection
of the output neutral to earth, depending on the actual installation please refer to the local
legal provisions.

4.7 External Protection


To ensure selectivity between the internal fuses and the distribution fuses, the maximum fuse
nominal current (rated circuit breaker current) at the load output is limited.

In addition, the conditions for the rectifier incoming feeder fuse (mains) can be seen in the
«Technical data».

CIRCUIT BREAKER
We recommend when inserting circuit breakers between the busbar and the consumer, to choose
such a type that its rated current not exceeds 15% of the nominal current of the system (voltage
drop over the line between UPS system and consumer max. 3%).

7RA9075GB: Rev.06 Page 8 / 8


.
.
.

ÍÛÎÊ×ÝÛ ‰ ÌÎß×Ò×ÒÙ ‰ ÝÑÒÌßÝÌ ßÜÜÎÛÍÍÛÍ Page 7 / 7 7RA9092GB: Rev.04

NORTH AND SOUTH AMERICA:


GUTOR Electronic LLC
12121 Wickchester Lane, Suite 400
Houston, Texas 77079, USA
P 281 588 2145
F 859 962 4593
gutor-service-us@schneider-electric.com

MIDDLE EAST:

CHAPTER 5
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Villa No.2, Defence Road,St.11,
Behind Gava Hotel,
P.O.Box 29580, Abu Dhabi, U.A.E.
P +971 (0)2 443 89 93
F +971 (0)2 443 89 92
gutor-service-ae@schneider-electric.com

DISPLAY — OPERATING &


SAUDI ARABIA:

INDICATING ELEMENTS
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Middle East Commercial Complex
AL-Khobar 31952
P.O.Box. 79575, Saudi Arabia
P +966 (0)3 864 9667
F +966 (0)3 864 9062
gutor-service-sa@schneider-electric.com

RUSSIA
The GUTOR by Schneider Hotline number is: 8-800-200-6446

Please dial 0 for technical consultation, then the Customer Care Center specialist will connect you
to GUTOR by Schneider engineer.

The hotline is open Monday to Friday 8am – 6 pm (Outside business hours please call our GUTOR
Hotline in Switzerland: +41 56 437 6263)

© GUTOR Electronic LLC CH-5430 Wettingen Switzerland


Gutor PxW
Display and Parameter Settings

Contents
1. DISPLAY UNIT .............................................................................................................................................. 2
2. CHANGE OF OPERATIONAL PARAMETERS............................................................................................. 2
3. MEASUREMENTS ON THE DISPLAY ......................................................................................................... 6
4. ALARMS ON THE DISPLAY ......................................................................................................................... 7
4.1 Alarm Log ............................................................................................................................................ 11

Rev. Description of change Original document #: 7RA9413GB Issued Validated Approved Date
01 First edition mp LOA LUS 13-09-16
02 New Ideograms / New buttons and display pictures mp LUS BKI 14-02-13
03 Change of the alarms 2-3 and 60-68 mp HLA LUS 15-05-27

Please note:
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means — electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording — for whatever reason, without the explicit written
permission of GUTOR Electronic LLC

7RA9413GB: Rev.03 Page 1 / 12


Display and Parameter Settings

1. DISPLAY UNIT
On the front of the UPS there is a display unit. It
consists of a LC display, an alarm LED, an acoustic
alarm and a Foil keypad (as shown on the left).

The display is used for programming the system and


for giving information (measurements and alarm
indications).

In a normal situation the current operational mode of


the system is shown on the display.

To get information or to program the system different


«stacks» have to be entered by means of the Foil
keypad. Normally the display will switch back
automatically to show the current operational mode if
the Foil keypad has not been activated within 30

secs or when has been pushed.

If however, a change in the operational mode occurs the display immediately switches over to show
the new operational mode.

In this case the entries have to be repeated by means of the Foil keypad for the system
programming or reading of information.

The following is a description of information which can be shown on the display, as well as
instructions to the programming/setting up, which can be performed by the user.

2. CHANGE OF OPERATIONAL PARAMETERS


On the display the following operational parameters can be programmed by the user — USER
STACK:
 Second Language
 Autostart
 Bypass operation
 Boost charge
 Autoboost charge
 Battery capacity test
 Battery monitor test
(only shown if the option «Advanced battery monitor» is installed)
 Battery monitor reset
(only shown if the option «Advanced battery monitor» is installed)
 Adaptive slewrate
 Enter new date
 Enter new time

7RA9413GB: Rev.03 Page 2 / 12


Display and Parameter Settings

To enter the «operational parameter» stack push and step inside the stack with the cursor

key or .

Second Language
Two of the following languages :
GB / CZ / DE / DK / ES / FI / FR / HU / IT / NL / NO / PL / PT / RU / SE / SK
can be chosen by the customer, when ordering the system.

The two languages have been preprogrammed by the factory according to the
specification.

The language can be changed by pushing and step inside the stack with the cursor key

or until the actual Language is shown on the display. The second language is

chosen by pushing for «ON». To return to the first language on the display, push

Autostart

To program the system for autostart, push and step inside the stack with the cursor key

or until: is shown on the display. Autostart is chosen by

pushing for «ON», and rejected by pushing for «OFF».

If Autostart is chosen the system will restart automatically at mains return, e.g. if the system has
switched off due to low battery voltage after battery operation during a mains failure.

Bypass Operation

To switch the system to bypass operation push and step inside the stack with the cursor

key or until: is shown on the display.

Bypass operation is chosen by pushing for «ON», the system then switches to bypass if

the bypass mains is within the tolerance range. The display then shows: .

The load is now supplied from the bypass mains via the static switch EN. The bypass mains voltage
and the output voltage are still shown.
0

The system can be switched back to normal operation by pushing to set bypass operation

«OFF». The load transfer from normal to bypass operation and vice versa takes place without any

7RA9413GB: Rev.03 Page 3 / 12


Display and Parameter Settings

interruption.

Boost Charge

To program the system for boost charge, push and step inside the stack with the cursor

key or until: is shown on the display.


1 0

Boost charge is chosen by pushing for «ON», and rejected by pushing for «OFF».

When boost charge is selected the system will only stay in the boost charge operational mode for
the time which has been preprogrammed by the factory. Boost charge is programmable between 0
and 24 hours for any change contact our works.

Auto Boost Charge

To program the system for auto boost charge, push and step inside the stack with the

cursor key or until: is shown on the display. Auto boost


1 0

charge is chosen by pushing for «ON», and rejected by pushing for «OFF».

When Autoboost is selected the system will automatically switch over to boost charge operation if
the battery has been discharged. The systems stays in boost charge operation for the time which
has been preprogrammed by the factory. This time is the time while the charger is outside the
battery current limitation. Boost charge is programmable between 0 and 24 hours for any
change contact our works.

Battery Capacity Test

For testing the battery capacity from the Foil keypad proceed as follows: push and step

inside the stack with the cursor key or until: is shown on

the display, where «xxx» is the back-up time of the last test — if not performed before or if the test
1

has been aborted, «???» is shown. Push to abort or to continue. The display

shows: , where «time > …min.» is only shown if option «Advanced battery

monitor» is installed, otherwise: is shown. Wait until the display shows:

and a short alarm has been activated. Push and until the display

shows , where «xxx» is the actual back-up time in minutes.

7RA9413GB: Rev.03 Page 4 / 12


Display and Parameter Settings

Push or wait 30secs until the display shows: .

Please note that after a battery capacity test it will take about 8...24 hours (depending on the
battery type) before the battery is recharged and the full back-up time is available again.

Battery Monitor Test


only shown if option «Advanced battery monitor» is installed.

To perform the battery monitor test push and step inside the stack with the cursor key

or until: is shown on the display. Battery monitor test can


0

be chosen by pushing for «ON», and rejected pushing for «OFF».

This function checks the battery condition by switching off the rectifier and let running the inverter in
battery operation until 25% of the battery capacity are used up.

The rectifier will automatically switch on again after the test is finalized or if a fault in the battery has
been detected no loss of the output voltage.

If the battery condition is within the tolerance range no alarm is shown on the display.

If the battery capacity is reduced, one of the following two alarms is shown on the display:

«Battery monitor warning» i.e. the battery capacity is reduced


«Battery monitor alarm» i.e. no battery capacity

For Redundant/Parallel connected systems:


Each unit in the system has to have its own battery. The battery monitor cannot be installed in
systems with a common battery.

Battery Monitor Reset


only shown if option «Advanced battery monitor» is installed

To reset the battery monitor push and step inside the stack with the cursor key or

until: is shown on the display. To reset the battery monitor alarms


1

push .

Adaptive Slewrate

To program the system for adaptive slewrate, push and step inside the stack with the

cursor keys or until: is shown on the display. Adaptive

7RA9413GB: Rev.03 Page 5 / 12


Display and Parameter Settings
1 0

slewrate is chosen by pushing for «ON», and rejected by pushing for «OFF».

If adaptive slewrate mode is chosen the system will automatically select its lowest slewrate with
which it can synchronize to the bypass mains. In the case of many bypass mains variations the
system automatically select the maximum allowable slewrate to ensure that the system remains
synchronous to the bypass mains.

Enter New Date

To set the current date in the system, push and step inside the stack with the cursor key

or until the display shows: . Thereafter push (for e.g. 10th

0 4 0 8

August 2004): and for confirming.

Enter New Time

To set the current time in the system, push and step inside the stack with the cursor key

or until the display shows: . Thereafter push (for e.g. 11h

1 1 7 0 0

47min 00secs): and for confirming.

Remember when entering the seconds, the clock is only activated when the confirmation

button has been pushed.

3. MEASUREMENTS ON THE DISPLAY


Measurements can be shown on the display by pushing one or two push-buttons simultaneously.
(All the following figures in the display are examples only).

 In the case of single phase UPS systems only the value on the right-hand side of
the window is indicated.

Push: the Display shows:


7

.............. ..........Mains voltage shows 3x 385 VAC


4

.............. ..........Mains current shows 3x 72 AAC


8

.............. ..........DC/Battery voltage shows 410 VDC

7RA9413GB: Rev.03 Page 6 / 12


Display and Parameter Settings

Push: the Display shows:


5

.............. ..........Battery current shows 10 ADC Charge current


-10 ADC Discharge current
2

.............. ..........Inverter current shows 3x 12 AAC 


6

.............. ..........Output current shows 3x 15 AAC 


3

.............. ..........Output frequency shows 50 Hz


9

.............. ..........Output voltage shows 3x 380 VAC 


7

..........Bypass mains voltage shows 3x 385 VAC 


6

..........Output peak current shows 3x 19 AAC 


5

..........Total DC current shows 10 ADC


8 5

..........Battery temperature is 25 °C (optional)

.............. ..........shows Date (YYYY.MM.DD) / Time (HH:MM:SS)

To return to normal status indication wait 30secs or push: . The display shows the current

operational mode.

4. ALARMS ON THE DISPLAY


If there are one or more alarms in the system the red «Common Alarm LED» (placed above the Foil
keypad) is ON, indicating that this (these) alarm(s) can be found in the alarm stack. The alarm LED
is ON as long as an alarm is present in the system.

The acoustic alarm is also activated, but only for 30 seconds. If the alarm disappears in less than
30 seconds the acoustic alarm will stop. If two or more alarms overlap each other, the acoustic
alarm will be activated for further 30 seconds with effect from the arise of the last alarm.

The alarm LED indicates that there is an alarm in the «alarm» stack. The stack contains those
alarms, which at the time in question exist. The alarms are placed in the stack in the same
succession as they arose, indicating the last alarm at first.

To read alarms in the «alarm» stack push and move inside the stack with the cursor key

or . The last text in the stack is «No (further) alarm».

7RA9413GB: Rev.03 Page 7 / 12


Display and Parameter Settings

The following alarms are possible:


Common
Alarm Warning / Shutdown / Time
Name Description Alarm
No. Indication delay [s]
Influence
Invalid checksum or ID of EEPROM
2 EEPROM read error Warning only 0
(invalid configuration data)
Error while writing parameters to the
3 EEPROM write error Warning only 0
EEPROM
System set in manual
4 Q050 in TEST or BYPASS position Warning only 0
BYPASS
Temperature warning of inverter power
5 TSM 1 temp warning Warning only 0 X
modulee (above warning level. >90°C)
Inverter Off and switch to
Temperature shutdown of inverter power
6 TSM 1 temp shutdown bypass if possible, 0 X
modulee (above shutdown level. >100°C)
otherwise shutdown
Temperature warning of inverter power
7 TSM 2 temp warning Warning only 0 X
modulee (above warning level. >90°C)
Inverter Off and switch to
Temperature shutdown of inverter power
8 TSM 2 temp shutdown bypass if possible, 0 X
modulee (above shutdown level. >100°C)
otherwise shutdown
Temperature warning of inverter power
9 TSM 3 temp warning Warning only 0 X
modulee (above warning level. >90°C)
Temperature shutdown of inverter power Inverter Off and switch to
10 TSM 3 temp shutdown modulee bypass if possible, 0 X
(above shutdown level. >100°C) otherwise shutdown
11 Battery monitor alarm Battery Voltage below defect level Warning only 0 X
12 CB03 current warning CB03 current below warning level Warning only 0 X
Both parallel cables are disconnected OR
13 No parallel communication the other UPS is black. Warning only 0 X
(only if Parallel UPS set in step 1)
14 Battery monitor warning Battery Voltage below weak level Warning only 0 X
15 Battery MCB OFF Battery breaker open Indication 0 X
Bypass freq out of
16 Bypass main frequency is out of tolerance Warning only 0 X
tolerance
Bypass inst out of Bypass voltage is out of tolerance
17 Warning only 0 X
tolerance (detected by momentary fast detection)
Bypass voltage is out of tolerance
18 Bypass is out of tolerance Warning only 0 X
(detected by average detection)
Communication error between FPU and
19 Int. DSP MPU comm. error Warning only 0 X
MPU
Temperature of charger 0° (A031) is
20 Charger 0° temp warning Warning only 0 X
above warning level (>90°C)
Charger Off and switch to
Temperature of charger 0° (A031) is battery or bypass if
21 Charger 0° temp shutdown 0 X
above shutdown level (>100°C) possible, otherwise
shutdown
Temperature of charger 30° (A030) is
22 Charger 30° temp warning Warning only 0 X
above warning level (>90°C)
Charger Off and switch to
Charger 30° temp Temperature of charger 30° (A030) is battery or bypass if
23 0 X
shutdown above shutdown level (>100°C) possible, otherwise
shutdown
Current above of calibrated loadprofile
24 Current limiter active (>150%) or Peak current limiter active or Warning only 0 X
Inverter module send current limiter active.

7RA9413GB: Rev.03 Page 8 / 12


Display and Parameter Settings

Common
Alarm Warning / Shutdown / Time
Name Description Alarm
No. Indication delay [s]
Influence

The load on the inverter output has


OVERLOAD: load is >
25 reached more than 100% of the nominal Warning only 0 X
100%
value.
DC Voltage has reached the High DC
26 High DC warning Warning only 0 X
warning level (for Inverter)
Charger Off and switch to
bypass if possible,
DC Voltage has reached the High DC otherwise shutdown
27 High DC shutdown 0 X
shutdown level (for Inverter) (or is step67=1 then
remains in battery
operation)
Output average voltage is above the upper
28 High output voltage Warning only 0 X
limit
Charger Off and switch to
Any of the 3 mains phase missing and the
battery or bypass if
29 Mains phase missing highest voltage is > 20% of nominal 0 X
possible, otherwise
voltage.
shutdown
Charger Off and switch to
Rectifier not synchronized to mains battery or bypass if
30 Rectifier Not synch 0 X
voltage. possible, otherwise
shutdown
After 10min Charger Off
High temp Charger Temperature of transformer or choke of and switch to battery or
31 0 X
magnetic the rectifier system is too high bypass if possible,
otherwise shutdown
After 10min Inverter Off
Temperature of transformer or choke of and switch to bypass if
32 High temp Invert. magnetic 0 X
the inverter system is too high possible, otherwise
shutdown
33 High battery temperature Temperature of battery is too high Warning only 0 X
Blocks inverter static
Voltage on Inverter (before EA) is about switch EA if Inverter turns
34 Inverter voltage error 0 X
<85% of Reference voltage on or if UPS is in bypass
operation
One or more of the inverter fuses have Inverter Off and switch to
35 Inverter fuse blown been blown bypass if possible, 0 X
(F021on A071:X003:1) otherwise shutdown
Input DC Voltage has reached the Low DC
36 Low DC warning Warning only 0 X
warning level
Inverter Off and switch to
Input DC Voltage has reached the Low DC
37 Low DC shutdown bypass if possible, 0 X
shutdown level
otherwise shutdown
38 DC current limit Total DC current limiter is active Warning only 5 X
Charger Off and switch to
battery or bypass if
39 Mains freq. out of tolerance Mains frequency is out of tolerance 0 X
possible, otherwise
shutdown
Charger Off and switch to
battery or bypass if
40 Mains phase rotation error Mains phase rotation is wrong 3 X
possible, otherwise
shutdown
Charger Off and switch to
41 Mains is out of tolerance Mains voltage is out of tolerance 0
Battery operation

7RA9413GB: Rev.03 Page 9 / 12


Display and Parameter Settings

Common
Alarm Warning / Shutdown / Time
Name Description Alarm
No. Indication delay [s]
Influence
Switch to bypass if
Output freq. out of
42 Output frequency is out of tolerance possible, otherwise 0 X
tolerance
shutdown after 5sec
Switch to bypass if
Output inst. out of Output voltage is out of tolerance.
43 possible, otherwise 0 X
tolerance Detected by momentary fast detection
shutdown after 5sec
Switch to bypass if
Output voltage is out of tolerance.
44 Output is out of tolerance possible, otherwise 0 X
Detected by average detection
shutdown after 5sec
UPS in bypass operation and
Sytem locked BYPASS
45 Bypass operation locked is set if Input Warning only 0
operation
A071:X003:03 is closed
46 Batt current limit Battery current limiter is active Warning only 5
Bypass is blocked. In
Static Switch EN temp Temperature of bypass static switch (EN) Bypass operation the UPS
47 0 X
shutdown is above shutdown level (>100°C) switch back to Inverter if
possible.
Static Switch EN temp Temperature of bypass static switch (EN)
48 Warning only 0 X
warning is above warning level (>90°C)
Switch to bypass if
Static Switch EA temp Temperature of inverter static switch (EA)
49 possible, otherwise 0 X
shutdown is above shutdown level (>100°C)
shutdown
Static Switch EA temp Temperature of inverter static switch (EA)
50 Warning only 0 X
warning is above warning level (>90°C)
Inverter is not able to synchronize to
51 Synchronization error Warning only 0 X
bypass (Phase difference >6 degrees)
If the inverter has changed more than 8
times to bypass and back in two minute,
52 System lock in oper. mode Warning only 0 X
then the inverter will remain in bypass
mode and this information is indicated
Switch to bypass if
53 CB03 current shutdown CB03 current below shutdown level possible, otherwise 0 X
shutdown
54 Fan fault One of the fans does not work properly Warning only 0 X
One of the supplies for internal power has
55 Fault in int power supply Warning only 0 X
been lost
Master UPS turns automatically Off in Indication that master UPS
OFF prevents general
56 case of current limiter active. turned off in case of X
shutdown
(Only in redundant systems) current limiter active.
Actual DC voltage not corresponding to
57 UI characteristic Warning only 5 X
reference DC voltage
Output of UPS1 and 2 Not connected OR
59 No Redundancy operation one of the UPS is in Standby or dark (Only Warning only 0 X
in redundant systems)
68 Mains breaker open Mains input breaker Q001 open Indication 0 X
69 Rectifier fuse blown Charger fuse F026 / F027 blown Indication 0 X
One of following supplies for the controller
70 Power Fail active Warning only 0 X
board failed: +5VDC; +/-12VDC
71 Earth fault DC minus Earth fault DC Minus. Warning only 0 X
72 Earth fault DC plus Earth fault DC Plus. Warning only 0 X
73 Byp. breaker open Bypass input breaker Q090 open Indication 0 X
74 Outp. breaker open Output breaker Q100 open Indication 0 X

7RA9413GB: Rev.03 Page 10 / 12


Display and Parameter Settings

Common
Alarm Warning / Shutdown / Time
Name Description Alarm
No. Indication delay [s]
Influence
Charger Off and switch to
battery or bypass if
75 PSU High DC High DC detected on PSU 0 X
possible, otherwise
shutdown
76 Rect. breaker open Rectifier output breaker open Indication 0 X
77 Inv. breaker open Inverter input breaker open Indication 0 X
78 Para. cable interrupted Parallel cable interrupted Warning only 0 X
79 Option 3 open Indication 0 X
80 Option 4 open Indication 0 X
81 Option 5 open Indication 0 X
82 Option 6 open Indication 0 X
84 System init. failed System initialization failed Startup not possible 0 X
Turns Charger OFF if DC
above limit and Charger
85 Charger VDC upper limit DC voltage above charger shutdown level. 0 X
starts DC voltage below
limit
93 FPU Watchdog failure Watchdog has detected failure of FPU Warning only 0 X
94 MPU Watchdog failure Watchdog has detected failure of MPU Warning only 0 X

The alarms are only present in the alarm stack as long as the red «Common Alarm LED» is on.

To leave the stack, wait 30secs or push: .

4.1 Alarm Log


The «log alarm» section of the program is a stack, which contains the last 250 arisen events. In the
stack both alarms and changes in the operational mode are stored. The events are placed in the
stack in the same succession as they arose indicating the last event at first. All events are time
stamped.
0

To enter the «log alarm» stack push and simultaneously and move inside the

stack by means of the cursor key or until the desired event is shown. The last text

in the stack is «No (further) alarm».


A SET alarm is indicated with «:»
A RESET alarm is indicated with «|»
Example:
34: Inverter voltage error
34| Inverter voltage error

7RA9413GB: Rev.03 Page 11 / 12


Display and Parameter Settings

The system will log the alarms shown in the alarm stack and at the same time the following
changes in the system:

Time Common
Alarm Warning / Shutdown /
Name Description delay Alarm
No. Indication
[s] Influence
OFF button on Frontpanel has been
0 OFF button pushed Indication only 0 X
pushed
1 ON button pushed ON button on Frontpanel has been pushed Indication only 0 X
A login to the level 2 parameters has
58 Calibration stack entered Indication only 0 X
occurred.
60 MPU is reset Main Processor Unit has been reseted. Indication only 0 X

61 Standby UPS is in standby operation Indication only 0 X

62 Normal operation UPS is in normal operation Indication only 0 X

63 Battery operation UPS is in battery operation Indication only 0 X

64 Bypass operation UPS is in bypass operation Indication only 0 X

65 Charger only UPS is in charger only operation Indication only 0 X

66 Economy operation UPS is in economy operation Indication only 0 X

67 Hot standby UPS is in hot standby operation Indication only 0 X

86 Engineering mode active Enginering mode entered. Indication only 0 X


Login to level 1 A login to the level 1 parameters has
87 Indication only 0 X
occurred.
88 Login failed Wrong password entered. Indication only 0 X
Parameter in level 0 A parameter in level 0 has been changed
89 Indication only 0 X
changed
Parameter in level 1 A parameter in level 1 has been changed
90 Indication only 0 X
changed
Parameter in level 2 A parameter in level 2 has been changed
91 Indication only 0 X
changed
Unsupported comm. An unsupported communication request
92 request has been received on the communication Indication only 0 X
port.
No (further) alarm End of alarm log

To check the time for the events go to the actual event by means of the cursor key or

, as mentioned before. At the actual event push and the time where the actual

event happened will be shown on the display with «year, month, day / hours, minutes, seconds».

To leave the log alarm stack wait 30 seconds or push: .

The log alarm stack can be cleared by keying in the password: 920701. Push simultaneously
1 2

and . The display will show: .

Key in the password 920701 and the alarm log will be cleared and the display will show:

7RA9413GB: Rev.03 Page 12 / 12


Gutor PxW
Operating and Indicating Elements

Contents
1. FRONT PANEL (Control and Monitoring Board) .......................................................................................... 3
2. OPERATION.................................................................................................................................................. 3
3. OPERATING STATUS INDICATIONS .......................................................................................................... 4
4. ALARM INDICATIONS .................................................................................................................................. 5
4.1 Alarm Indication Concept ...................................................................................................................... 5
4.2 Description of the Individual Alarms ...................................................................................................... 6
4.3 Common Alarm ...................................................................................................................................... 7
4.4 Potential-Free Relay Contacts............................................................................................................... 7
5. ANALOGOUS INSTRUMENTS / SWITCHES ............................................................................................... 8
6. EXTERNAL CONNECTION P.C.BOARD ...................................................................................................... 9

Rev. Description of change Original document #: 7RA9077GB Issued Validated Approved Date
01 First edition mp CHN LUS 15-06-29

Please note:
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means — electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording — for whatever reason, without the explicit written
permission of GUTOR Electronic LLC

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 1 / 9


Operating and Indicating Elements (FRONTPANEL — Control- and Monitoring Board)

OPERATING STATUS INDICATION OPERATION DISPLAY

7 8 9

ON 4 5 6

1 2 3
OFF

C
0

ALARM INDICATION

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 2 / 9


Operating and Indicating Elements

1. FRONT PANEL (Control and Monitoring Board)


see page 2

The Front panel (Control and Monitoring board) is divided up in the following functional sections:

• Display unit ......................................... see Description: «Display and Parameter Settings


• Operation ............................................ Section 2
• Operating status indications ............ Section 3
• Alarm indications ............................... Section 4

Depending upon the system configuration, the switches mentioned in this


description can be circuit breakers, switch-disconnectors (fuse switch-
disconnectors) and the designation can be made according to customer's request
see «Single line diagram».

2. OPERATION
Button Designation Explanation
SYSTEM ON Push-button for turning on the entire system.

OFF Push-button for turning off the entire system. For this function the

push-button «OFF» must be pressed at the same time as

push-button «ON».

With this action the system is shut-down


no output voltage.

LAMP TEST The push-button may be pressed at any time. It serves for checking
whether all indications of the «Operating status indications» and
«Alarm indications» function. The potential-free alarm contacts are
not energized.

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 3 / 9


Operating and Indicating Elements

3. OPERATING STATUS INDICATIONS

Pos. Designation Explanation


1 RECT. MAINS O.K. The rectifier mains is present and within the specified tolerance range,
(green) for voltage and frequency.
For tolerances see «Technical Data».
2 RECT. OPERATION The rectifier is switched on. The firing pulses to the thyristors are
(green) enabled.
3 BOOST CHARGE The boost charge has been initiated manually or automatically.
(yellow)
4 BATT. OPERATION The battery is supplying the inverter with energy.
(green)
5 INV. OPERATION The inverter is switched on. The inverter control logic releases the
(green) control signals to the PM blocks. However, this is not a sign that the
inverter operates correctly.
6 SYNCHRONOUS Illuminates, if the inverter is synchronised to the bypass mains.
(yellow)
7 INV. VOLTAGE O.K. The inverter voltage is within the specified tolerance range.
(green) For tolerances see «Technical Data».
9 BYPASS MAINS O.K. The bypass mains is present and within the specified tolerance range,
(green) for voltage and frequency.
For tolerances see «Technical Data».
10 LOAD VIA EN The static switch EN is switched on. The bypass mains supplies the
(green) load via EN.
11 MANUAL BYPASS The UPS system is switched to the bypass mains for test, repair or
(green) maintenance work. The manual bypass switch is in position
«BYPASS», or «TEST» (if option «Bypass with 3 switching positions»
installed).
12 Battery switch ON The battery fuse is inserted and the battery switch Q004 and/or Q005 is
(green) switched on.
13 Battery switch OFF The battery fuse has blown or the battery switch Q004 and/or Q005 has
(red) tripped or is switched off.

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 4 / 9


Operating and Indicating Elements

Pos. Designation Explanation


14 Input switch ON The rectifier input switch Q001 is switched on.
(green)
15 Input switch OFF The rectifier input switch Q001 has tripped or is switched off.
(red)
16 Bypass switch ON The bypass input switch Q090 is switched on.
(green)
17 Bypass switch OFF The bypass input switch Q090 has tripped or is switched off.
(red)

4. ALARM INDICATIONS
4.1 Alarm Indication Concept
The alarm indication concept enables a more precise fault diagnosis because of the distinction
between first alarm, further alarm, permanent fault and transient fault.

INDICATION CRITERIA:

a) 1st value indicator: The first arriving alarm is indicated as a «rapidly flashing» 1st
(rapidly flashing) value and will be memorized.
b) Further alarm: If further alarms follow, they will illuminate «slowly flashing».
(slowly flashing)
c) Permanent alarms: These are alarms already reset (1st value or further alarms)
(Steady indication) which are still present.

ALARM RESET:

Reset of the red alarm indications (Push-button C on the Display unit )

Reset of internal horn (Push-button on the Display unit )

1st Reset: • Reset of external horn.


• 1st value always remains «rapidly flashing».
• If a fault is still present, the «slowly flashing» indication changes
to «steady indication».
• If a fault is no longer present, the «slowly flashing» indication will
extinguish.
If a fault with steady indication disappears, the indication
extinguishes
in the event of a new alarm: • The internal and external horn is activated.
• The alarm is indicated as «slowly flashing».
2nd Reset: • Reset of the 1st value alarms from «rapidly flashing» indication
to «steady indication», if the fault is still present.
• The «rapidly flashing» indication extinguishes, if the fault is no
longer present.
If a fault with steady indication disappears, the indication
extinguishes.

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 5 / 9


Operating and Indicating Elements

in the event of a new alarm: • The internal and external horn is activated and indicated as
«rapidly flashing», if no former fault is present.
• The internal and external horn is activated and indicated as
«slowly flashing», if former faults are still present.

4.2 Description of the Individual Alarms

Designation Explanation
RECTIFIER MAINS FAULT The indication illuminates if one or more phases of the mains voltage as
(30 s) well as the frequency are out of tolerance.
For tolerances see «Technical Data».
RECTIFIER FAILURE The indication illuminates only, if all the following events occur
(5 s) simultaneously:
the rectifier mains is ok,
the rectifier is not operating in current limitation,
and the rectifier voltage drops below the level «DC low - alarm». For
tolerances see «Technical Data»;
or in case of overtemperature on the rectifier power units.
DC OUT OF TOLERANCE The inverter is shut-down, since the DC voltage is out of the tolerance
(5 s) range of «DC low - shut-down» or «DC high - shut-down».
For tolerances see «Technical Data».
BATTERY OPERATION The energy for the inverter is supplied from the battery.
(30 s)
BATTERY DISCHARGED The battery voltage is dropped below «DC low - alarm»
(5 s) For tolerances see «Technical Data».
BATT. DISCONNECTED The battery is disconnected from the system, i.e. the battery fuse or switch
(5 s) has released. If a battery MCCB is inserted, this indicates whether the
MCCB has tripped or manually been disconnected.
EARTH FAULT DC The DC earth fault current for the battery positive (+) or negative (-) has
(5 s) exceeded the alarm level.
For tolerances see «Technical Data».
INVERTER FAULT The indication illuminates only, if all the following events occur
(5 s) simultaneously:
♦ inverter switched on
♦ inverter not overloaded
♦ inverter output voltage out of the tolerance range. For tolerances
see «Technical Data»;
or inverter switched off;
or in the case of overtemperature on the inverter power units.
OVERLOAD INV/BYPASS Overload at the inverter or bypass. (Overload = > 100% load).
(30 s)
INVERTER FUSE BLOWN One or more of the inverter fuses have blown or the inverter input switch
(5 s) (option) is open.

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 6 / 9


Operating and Indicating Elements

Designation Explanation
ASYNCHRONOUS The inverter is asynchronous to the bypass mains.
(30 s)
BYPASS MAINS FAULT The bypass mains voltage or the frequency, measured at the input of the
(30 s) static switch EN, is out of tolerance
For tolerances see «Technical Data».
MANUAL BYPASS ON The manual bypass switch is in position «BYPASS». If a switch with 3
(5 s) switching positions is equipped, in position «TEST» or «BYPASS».
EN INHIBITED The mains-side static switch EN is inhibited if:
(30 s) ♦ the bypass mains voltage is out of tolerance,
♦ the bypass mains frequency is out of tolerance, or
♦ overtemperature at the static switch EN
For tolerances see «Technical Data».
OVERTEMPERATURE The following elements have a thermal monitoring:
(5 s) ♦ Rectifier bridge
♦ Rectifier transformer
♦ DC choke
♦ Power module
♦ Inverter transformer
♦ AC choke
♦ Static switch EN
FAN FAILURE One or more fans in the system have failed.
(30 s)
POWER SUPPLY FAULT One of the electronic supplies (+5V/±12V/+20V) is out of tolerance, or the
(5 s) feeding of one of the power supplies is not available (Rectifier / Bypass
mains or DC).
(Option 3) The temperature of the Output transfosrmer T100 is too high.
120/240V DIST. TRAFO T100
OVERTEMPERATURE
(5 s)

4.3 Common Alarm


If one or more alarms are active in the system according to section 4 «Alarms in the display» of the
description «Display and Parameter settings» the red «Common alarm» LED, located on the
display unit just below the LC display and above the foil keypad illuminates, as well as the
«Common alarm relays» X001 and X002 on the external connection p.c.board drops out after a
pre-programmed delay time (factory set).

4.4 Potential-Free Relay Contacts


For customers’ own use up to 2x 16 alarms are available as potential-free contacts on a relay strip.
The explanations given in section 4.2 «Description to the individual alarms» and 4.3 «Common
alarm» are also valid for the alarms on the relay contacts. The contacts are activated
simultaneously with the respective indication in the alarm indication field see connection
diagram.

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 7 / 9


Operating and Indicating Elements

SPECIFICATION FOR RELAY

Description Minimum Maximum Note


Contact voltage AC 6 V AC 250 V AC 50 / 60 Hz
50 / 60 Hz
Contact current AC 50 mA AC 8 A AC
resistive load
Contact voltage DC 6 V DC 250 V DC 6 V DC
Contact current DC 50 mA DC 0,3 A DC 8 A DC

5. ANALOGOUS INSTRUMENTS / SWITCHES


AC Instruments DC Instruments Switches
A V Hz A V
50

- P092 - - - - S091

Pos. Instrument Explanation


P092 AC voltmeter Indicates the bypass mains input AC voltage, measured before the
bypass input switch Q090.
S091 Phase selector switch For the measurement of the individual phases L1, L2 or L3 for the bypass
input voltmeter P092.

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 8 / 9


Operating and Indicating Elements

6. EXTERNAL CONNECTION P.C.BOARD

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 9 / 9


.
.
.

ÍÛÎÊ×ÝÛ ‰ ÌÎß×Ò×ÒÙ ‰ ÝÑÒÌßÝÌ ßÜÜÎÛÍÍÛÍ Page 7 / 7 7RA9092GB: Rev.04

NORTH AND SOUTH AMERICA:


GUTOR Electronic LLC
12121 Wickchester Lane, Suite 400
Houston, Texas 77079, USA
P 281 588 2145
F 859 962 4593
gutor-service-us@schneider-electric.com

MIDDLE EAST:

CHAPTER 6
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Villa No.2, Defence Road,St.11,
Behind Gava Hotel,
P.O.Box 29580, Abu Dhabi, U.A.E.
P +971 (0)2 443 89 93
F +971 (0)2 443 89 92
gutor-service-ae@schneider-electric.com

COMMISSIONING
SAUDI ARABIA:
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Middle East Commercial Complex
AL-Khobar 31952
P.O.Box. 79575, Saudi Arabia
P +966 (0)3 864 9667
F +966 (0)3 864 9062
gutor-service-sa@schneider-electric.com

RUSSIA
The GUTOR by Schneider Hotline number is: 8-800-200-6446

Please dial 0 for technical consultation, then the Customer Care Center specialist will connect you
to GUTOR by Schneider engineer.

The hotline is open Monday to Friday 8am – 6 pm (Outside business hours please call our GUTOR
Hotline in Switzerland: +41 56 437 6263)

© GUTOR Electronic LLC CH-5430 Wettingen Switzerland


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

V/A/F MEASUREMENTS TO BE READ ON THE DISPLAY

BYPASS / INCOMING
A A
50A/4POL 30KVA
-T090
-X090 -Q090
L1,L2,L3

PE

-S091 VS
BYPASS MAINS
3x480V, 60Hz

150A
3PH, 3W

B V -Q050 B

-P092 BYPASS
UPS V
TEST
AUTO
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

800A -A035
V -F028 -K037 EN
-T100 -X004
100A
-X001 -T001 -T002 L1,L2,N
-Q001 -A030 -L001 -A032 -L002 300A PE
L1,L2
C L3 -F021 C
1x240/120V
PE 60Hz 1PH. 3W
30KVA
30KVA PRI: 240V
SEC: 240/120V
3x480V, 60Hz
MAINS INPUT

-CB02 -CB03
3PH, 3W

V/A A A A V V/A/F

D D

-L005

400A
-Q004

B+,B-
-X002 125V DC
E E

BATTERY
60 x GNB 90G15

F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 UPS 1150079001/00 03 1/ 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

12 PULSE TRANSFORMER
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER ANALOGUE METER 27 UNDERVOLTAGE RELAY
6 PULSE TRANSFORMER
A
A A = AMMETER A
GCB V = VOLTMETER
GAS CIRCUIT BREAKER Hz = FREQUENCY METER 37 UNDERCURRENT RELAY

STABILIZER W = WATTMETER
ACB cos = POWER FACTOR METER
AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER 59 OVERVOLTAGE RELAY

A DIGITAL METER
CHOKE A = AMMETER
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER 51 OVERCURRENT RELAY
V = VOLTMETER
B Hz = FREQUENCY METER B

FUSE DISCONNECTOR SWITCH W = WATTMETER 49 THERMAL RELAY


S SELECTOR SWITCH cos = POWER FACTOR METER
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

LOAD BREAKING SWITCH 25 SYNCHRONIZING CHECK RELAY

CAPACITOR
V/A/F MEASUREMENTS TO BE READ
FUSE SWITCH ON THE DISPLAY ELR EARTH LEAKAGE RELAY
A = AMMETER
C V = VOLTMETER C
Hz = FREQUENCY METER
BLOCKING DIODE
GROUNDING LINK EF EARTH FAULT RELAY

FUSE SCR SYNCHRO CHECK RELAY


VOLTAGE DROPPER RECTIFIER
0.0V 0.8 V 4.0 V

CONTACTOR L1,L2
L3
D TERMINALS INVERTER D
EQUIPMENT CODE
PE
CODE DESCRIPTION
A ASSEMBLIES , VARIOUS BOARDS
BATTERY STATIC SWITCH B SENSOR , FIRE DETECTOR
BYPASS C CAPACITOR , STORAGE DEVICES
TEST F FUSE , PROTECTION DEVICES
AUTO G GENERATOR
I
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE TRANSDUCER H SIGNAL LAMP , LIGHTING
3 POSITION I
E SWITCH K CONTACTOR , RELAY , FILTER E
M MOTOR
P DISPLAY UNIT
EARTH Q SWITCHING DEVICES FOR POWER CIRCUIT
R RESISTOR
S SELECTOR SWITCH , CONTROL SWITCHES
T CONVERTER , TRANSFORMER , TRANSDUCER
W BUS BAR
X TERMINALS , PLUGS
F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 LEGEND 1150079001/00 03 2 / 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Gutor PxW
Starting — Switching Over — Stopping
of Single Systems

Contents
1. OPERATIONAL BUTTONS FOR STARTING, SWITCHING OVER, STOPPING ........................................ 2
2. STARTING THE UPS SYSTEM .................................................................................................................... 2
3. SWITCHING OVER FROM NORMAL OPERATION TO BYPASS OPERATION ........................................ 3
4. SWITCHING OVER FROM BYPASS OPERATION TO NORMAL OPERATION ........................................ 3
5. SWITCHING OVER TO MANUAL BYPASS ................................................................................................. 4
6. SWITCHING OVER FROM MANUAL BYPASS TO NORMAL OPERATION ............................................... 5
7. STOPPING THE UPS SYSTEM.................................................................................................................... 5

Rev. Description of change Original document #: 7RA9118GB Issued Validated Approved Date
04 New Design mp MDR LUS 13-08-22
05 New Ideograms / New buttons and display pictures mp LUS BKI 14-02-13

Please note:
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means — electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording — for whatever reason, without the explicit written
permission of GUTOR Electronic LLC

7RA9118GB: Rev.05 Page 1 / 5


Starting — Switching Over — Stopping of Single Systems

! This chapter contains all the necessary information to operate the UPS system
after installation and commissioning. See also
Installation» and «Commissioning».
Instruction «Erection –
NOTICE

1. OPERATIONAL BUTTONS FOR STARTING, SWITCHING


OVER, STOPPING
.................. Button «SYSTEM ON» for switching on the UPS system

.................. Button «OFF» for switching off the UPS system (simultaneously the button

has to be pushed)

.................. Button «LAMP TEST»

.................. Operational parameters

..... Cursor keys for the selection between operational parameters

.................. Activation of ON

.................. Activation of OFF

2. STARTING THE UPS SYSTEM


When the system is programmed for «AUTOSTART» the system will start
automatically after 60secs., if the rectifier mains is switched on and within the
tolerance range.

1. Switch on the rectifier mains supply (close the rectifier input switch Q001). The display

shows: . After 10 seconds the display changes to:

2. Turn on the UPS system by pressing the button on the front panel. If the display

shows: wait a short time or press any button, e.g. C , then the

7RA9118GB: Rev.05 Page 2 / 5


Starting — Switching Over — Stopping of Single Systems

display shows: .

3. Connect the battery (close the battery switch Q004).


8

4. Check the battery voltage in the display by pressing the button .

5. Check in the display that the inverter output voltage is within the tolerance range by
9

pressing the button .

6. Switch on the bypass mains supply (close the bypass input switch Q090).

7. Wait 10 seconds and then press the button C until all red LED’s of «Alarm indications»

are extinguished.

Now the UPS system is switched on.

3. SWITCHING OVER FROM NORMAL OPERATION TO


BYPASS OPERATION
1. Switch over the UPS system to bypass operation by means of the foil keypad by pressing

and then the cursor key or until the display shows:


1

. Thereafter press and if the bypass mains is within the

tolerance range the green LED 9 «BYPASS MAINS O.K.» and the yellow LED 6

«SYNCHRONOUS» are illuminated and the display shows: .

The load is now supplied direct from the bypass mains.

If during bypass operation a fault in the bypass mains occurs, the system will automatically
switch over to normal operation if the rectifier mains is available, otherwise to battery
operation if the battery is available and within the tolerance range.

Depending on the programming a short loss of the output voltage can occur.

4. SWITCHING OVER FROM BYPASS OPERATION TO


NORMAL OPERATION
1. Switch over the UPS system to normal operation by means of the foil keypad by pressing

and then the cursor key or until the display shows:

7RA9118GB: Rev.05 Page 3 / 5


Starting — Switching Over — Stopping of Single Systems
0

. Thereafter press and the display shows:

The load is now supplied direct from the system.

5. SWITCHING OVER TO MANUAL BYPASS

Never actuate the manual bypass switch when the system is running in
normal operation !

1. Switch over the UPS system to bypass operation by means of the foil keypad by pressing

and then the cursor key or until the display shows:

. Thereafter press and if the bypass mains is within the

tolerance range the green LED 9 «BYPASS MAINS O.K.» and the yellow LED 6

«SYNCHRONOUS» are illuminated and the display shows: .

Step 2 and 2b) have to be performed for systems with 2-position manual
bypass switch.

Step 2a), 2b) and 2c) have to be performed for systems with 3-position
manual bypass switch.

2. Before switching the manual bypass switch Q050 to position «BYPASS», secure that the
static switch EN is turned on (the green LED 10 «LOAD VIA EN» must illuminate), then turn
the manual bypass switch Q050 to position «BYPASS» the green LED 11
«MANUAL BYPASS» illuminates.

2a) Before switching the manual bypass switch Q050 to position «TEST», secure that the static
switch EN is turned on (the green LED 10 «LOAD VIA EN» must illuminate), then turn the
manual bypass switch Q050 to position «TEST» the green LED 11 «MANUAL
BYPASS» illuminates.

2b) Turn off the UPS by pressing simultaneously the buttons and on the front

panel the UPS changes to standby operation. The display shows:

2c) Then turn the manual bypass switch Q050 to position «BYPASS». The green LED
11 «MANUAL BYPASS» illuminates.

The load is supplied direct from the bypass mains.

7RA9118GB: Rev.05 Page 4 / 5


Starting — Switching Over — Stopping of Single Systems

In the case of a bypass fault the consumers are no longer supplied !

6. SWITCHING OVER FROM MANUAL BYPASS TO NORMAL


OPERATION
Proceed as under section 4 «Recommissioning of the UPS» of the instructions
«Commissioning».

7. STOPPING THE UPS SYSTEM

Ensure that the users of all consumers connected to the UPS system are informed
before proceeding with the following steps and before turning off the system.

After the following steps, i.e. after approx. 5 minutes, when the DC capacitor bank
has discharged, the UPS system is volt-free with the exception of components,
which are connected between the terminals and the switch.
NO OUTPUT VOLTAGE !
Check by means of a voltage measuring device that all power sections are de-
energized. Remember, the rectifier mains and the bypass mains, as well
as the battery are still applied !
The connecting terminals are carrying hazardous voltage !

STOPPING THE SYSTEM FROM NORMAL OPERATION:


1. Switch off the bypass mains supply (open the bypass input switch Q090).

2. Press simultaneously the buttons and on the front panel for switching off the

system. The display shows: .

3. Disconnect the battery (open the battery switch Q004).

4. Turn off the rectifier mains supply (open the rectifier input switch Q001).

After approx. 30 seconds the display shows no indication.

Thereafter the UPS system is turned off all LED indications are
extinguished.

7RA9118GB: Rev.05 Page 5 / 5


Gutor PxW
Commissioning of
of UPS System with 3-position Manual bypass switch
and Static switch EN

Contents
1. PREPARATIONS WITH POWER OFF 3
2. COMMISSIONING OF THE UPS SYSTEM 3
3. SWITCHING VOLT-FREE OF THE UPS SYSTEM 6
4. RECOMMISSIONING OF THE UPS SYSTEM 7

Rev. Description of change Original document #: 7RA9121GB Issued Validated Approved Date
01 First edition mp CHN LUS 15-06-29

Please note:
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means — electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording — for whatever reason, without the explicit written
permission of GUTOR Electronic LLC

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 1 / 8


Commissioning

The Initial checks are subdivided in two Major parts:


♦ one with power OFF
♦ one with power ON

When planning the initial checks read first the complete chapter before starting the
check procedure.

Principle diagram
Depending upon the system configuration, the switches mentioned in this
description can be circuit breakers, switch-disconnectors (fuse switch-
disconnectors) and the designation can be made according to customer's request
see «Single line diagram».

Operating status indications / Alarm indications / Fault location


For detailed explanation:
see Description «Operating & Indicating Elements» and «Display & Parameter settings»

For eventual fault location:


see Description «Trouble Shooting»

FRONT PANEL

OPERATING STATUS INDICATION OPERATION DISPLAY UNIT

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 2 / 8


Commissioning

1. PREPARATIONS WITH POWER OFF


Before connecting the local network, the battery and the load to the UPS system, the following
proceedings are necessary:

1. Check by means of a voltage measuring device that all power sections are de-energized.

2. Check that the earthing of all cubicles is secure and there are no damages.

3. Check that all connectors are firmly fixed.

4. Check that all printed circuit boards are correctly mounted and the plugs are firmly plugged
in.

5. Check all interconnections and junctions according to the «Connection diagram».

6. Check that the external fuses have the correct size.

7. If bags with moisture absorbing material are in the cubicle, remove these.

Check that the interior of the UPS system is dry. If there is any condensed
water, let the UPS system stand with the front doors open in a dry and warm
area for at least 24 hours.

Preparations on the UPS system before the commissioning:


a) BYPASS / DISTRIBUTION / OUTPUT
• Bypass input switch ....................................................Q090 open
• Manual bypass switch ................................................Q050 at position «BYPASS»
• Outgoing feeders (if available) ....................................ALL open
• Consumers ..................................................................volt-free

b) UPS
• Rectifier input switch ...................................................Q001 open
• Battery switch ..............................................................Q004 open

2. COMMISSIONING OF THE UPS SYSTEM


The commissioning is performed according to these instructions:
1. Check preparations as under section 1.

2. Apply the rectifier mains voltage (according to «Connection diagram») and check phase
sequence as well as the voltage.

3. Apply the bypass mains voltage (according to «Connection diagram») and check the voltage.

4. Close the bypass input switch Q090.

The safe bus is now energized via the closed bypass input switch Q090 and
the manual bypass switch Q050.

5. Close the rectifier input switch Q001. The display shows: for 10

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 3 / 8


Commissioning

seconds, thereafter the display changes to: . If the UPS system is

programmed for «AUTOSTART» see «Technical data» and the rectifier mains is
within the tolerance range the UPS system will start automatically after 60 seconds.
The green LED’s 14, 16, 1 & 11 as well as the red LED 13 illuminate.

6. Press the button «LAMP TEST» on the front panel and check that all LED’s of the

«Operating status indications» and «Alarm indications» illuminate.

7. Turn on the UPS system (if not already ensued automatically) by pressing on the

front panel. If the display shows: wait a short time or press any

button, e.g. C , then the display shows: . The green

LED’s 2 & 5 are additionally illuminated (also LED 7, but only if the inverter output voltage is
o.k.).
8

8. Check the rectifier output voltage in the display by pressing the button .

9. Close the battery switch Q004. The green LED 12 is additionally illuminated and the
red LED 13 extinguishes.
5

10. Check the battery current in the display by pressing the button .

11. Check in the display that the inverter output voltage is within the tolerance range by
9

pressing the button . The green LED 7 «INV. VOLTAGE O.K.» must illuminate.

12. Turn off the rectifier mains by opening the rectifier input switch Q001. The UPS
system changes to battery operation.

13. Check that the green LED 4 «BATTERY OPERATION» and the red LED 15 illuminate,
whereby the green LED 12 remains illuminated and the LED’s 14, 1 & 2 extinguish. The red
LED «BATTERY OPERATION» of the «Alarm indications» illuminates after a 30 seconds

delay and the display shows: , where «time > …min.» is only

shown if option «Advanced battery monitor» is installed.

14. Close the rectifier input switch Q001.

Check that the UPS system switches back to normal operation. The green LED 4
and the red LED 15 extinguish — the green LED’s 14, 16, 12, 1, 2, 5, 7 & 11 illuminate.

15. Turn manual bypass switch Q050 to position «TEST».

16. Check that the yellow LED 6 «SYNCHRONOUS» illuminates (bypass mains must be
available and within the tolerance range — this will be indicated by the green LED 9
«BYPASS MAINS O.K.»).

17. Switch over the UPS system to bypass operation using the Foil keypad by pressing

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 4 / 8


Commissioning

and then the cursor key or until the display shows:


1

. Thereafter press and if the bypass mains is within the tolerance range the green

LED 9 «BYPASS MAINS O.K.» and the yellow LED 6 «SYNCHRONOUS» are illuminated

and the display shows: .. Check that the green LED 10 «LOAD VIA

EN» illuminates — the green 5 extinguishes.

18. Switch back the UPS system to normal operation using the Foil keypad by pressing

and then the cursor key or until the display shows:


0

. Thereafter press and the display shows: . Check that the

green LED 5 «INV. OPERATION» illuminates and that the green LED’s 7 & 9 and the yellow
LED 6 remains illuminated — the green LED 10 extinguishes.

19. Switch over the UPS system to bypass operation using the Foil keypad (as explained
before).

20. Check that the green LED 9 «BYPASS MAINS O.K.» and LED 10 «LOAD VIA EN»
illuminate and that the green LED 5 «INV. OPERATION» extinguishes and the display

shows: .

21. Before switching the manual bypass switch Q050 to position «AUTO», secure that the static
switch EN is turned on (the green LED 10 «LOAD VIA EN» must illuminate), then turn the
manual bypass switch Q050 to position «AUTO» the green LED 11 extinguishes.

22. Switch back the UPS system to normal operation using the Foil keypad (as explained
before). The UPS system is now in normal operation with the static switch EN turned off.

23. Check that the green LED 5 «INV. OPERATION» and the green LED 7 «INV. VOLTAGE

O.K.» illuminate and the display shows: .

24. Reset the alarms by pressing C .

25. Make sure that the UPS system operates correctly and no alarm of the «Alarm indications» is
pending.

The safe bus is energized.


The following LED’s are illuminated: the green LED’s 14, 16, 12, 1, 2, 5, 7
& 9 as well as the yellow LED 6.

26. Close ALL outgoing feeders in the distribution (if available).

All consumers are now supplied from the inverter.

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 5 / 8


Commissioning

The output terminals are carrying hazardous voltage !

27. Reset eventual alarms by pressing C until all red LED’s are extinguished. The horn can

be reset by pressing .
1 2

28. Clear the log alarm stack by pressing simultaneously and . Then the display

shows: . Key in the password 920701 and the alarm log will be

cleared. The display shows: . To return to normal operating status

indication wait 20secs or press . The display shows: .

3. SWITCHING VOLT-FREE OF THE UPS SYSTEM


With these instructions the UPS system can be switched volt-free. The load is then
supplied via the manual bypass switch Q050 from the bypass mains.

The bypass mains must be available and within the tolerance range.

1. Switch over the UPS system to bypass operation using the Foil keypad (as explained
before). If the bypass mains voltage is available and within the tolerance range the green
LED 9 «BYPASS MAINS O.K.» illuminates and the changeover logic changes to EN.
The green LED 10 «LOAD VIA EN» illuminates.

2. After the static switch EN is switched on, turn the manual bypass switch Q050 to position
«TEST». The green LED 11 «MANUAL BYPASS» illuminates.

3. Turn off the UPS system by pressing simultaneously the buttons and on the

front panel the UPS system changes to standby operation. The display shows:

. The green LED’s 2, 5 & 7 extinguish — the yellow LED 6

is still illuminated.

4. Open the battery switch Q004. The green LED 12 extinguishes and the red LED 13
illuminates.

5. Open the rectifier input switch Q001. The green LED’s 14 & 1 extinguish.

6. Turn manual bypass switch Q050 to position «BYPASS».

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 6 / 8


Commissioning

After approx. 5 minutes, when the DC capacitors have discharged, the UPS
system is volt-free with the exception of components, which are connected
between the terminals and the switch.

Check by means of a voltage measuring device that all power sections are
de-energized. Remember, the rectifier mains and the bypass
mains, as well as the battery are still applied !

The connecting terminals are carrying hazardous voltage !

4. RECOMMISSIONING OF THE UPS SYSTEM


These instructions describe the recommissioning of the UPS system after it has been
switched volt-free.
1. Turn manual bypass switch Q050 to position «TEST».

2. Close the rectifier input switch Q001.


If the UPS system is programmed for «AUTOSTART» see «Technical data» and
the rectifier mains is within the tolerance range the UPS system will start automatically after
60 seconds. The system starts up to standby operation and the display shows
«Standby». The green LED’s 14, 16, 1 & 11 as well as the yellow LED 6 and the red
LED 13 illuminate.

3. Turn on the UPS system (if not already ensued automatically) by pressing the button

on the front panel The system starts up to normal operation and if the display

shows: wait a short time or press any button, e.g. C , then the

display shows: . The green LED’s 2, 5 & 7 are additionally

illuminated.

4. Check in the display that the rectifier output voltage is within the tolerance range by
8

pressing the button .

5. Close the battery switch Q004. The green LED 12 is additionally illuminated and the
red LED 13 extinguishes.

6. Switch over the UPS system to bypass operation using the Foil keypad (as explained
before).

7. Check that the green LED 10 «LOAD VIA EN» illuminates and the display shows:

8. Turn the manual bypass switch Q050 to position «AUTO».

9. Switch back the UPS system to normal operation using the Foil keypad (as explained
before).

10. Reset the alarms by pressing the button C .

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 7 / 8


Commissioning

11. Make sure that the UPS system operates correctly and no alarm is pending.

Now, the consumers are supplied again by the system.

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 8 / 8


.
.
.

ÍÛÎÊ×ÝÛ ‰ ÌÎß×Ò×ÒÙ ‰ ÝÑÒÌßÝÌ ßÜÜÎÛÍÍÛÍ Page 7 / 7 7RA9092GB: Rev.04

NORTH AND SOUTH AMERICA:


GUTOR Electronic LLC
12121 Wickchester Lane, Suite 400
Houston, Texas 77079, USA
P 281 588 2145
F 859 962 4593
gutor-service-us@schneider-electric.com

MIDDLE EAST:

CHAPTER 7
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Villa No.2, Defence Road,St.11,
Behind Gava Hotel,
P.O.Box 29580, Abu Dhabi, U.A.E.
P +971 (0)2 443 89 93
F +971 (0)2 443 89 92
gutor-service-ae@schneider-electric.com

MAINTENANCE
SAUDI ARABIA:
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Middle East Commercial Complex
AL-Khobar 31952
P.O.Box. 79575, Saudi Arabia
P +966 (0)3 864 9667
F +966 (0)3 864 9062
gutor-service-sa@schneider-electric.com

RUSSIA
The GUTOR by Schneider Hotline number is: 8-800-200-6446

Please dial 0 for technical consultation, then the Customer Care Center specialist will connect you
to GUTOR by Schneider engineer.

The hotline is open Monday to Friday 8am – 6 pm (Outside business hours please call our GUTOR
Hotline in Switzerland: +41 56 437 6263)

© GUTOR Electronic LLC CH-5430 Wettingen Switzerland


Gutor PxW
Maintenance

Contents
1. MAINTENANCE OF THE UPS SYSTEM ...................................................................................................... 2
1.1 Monthly Checks ..................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 Semiannual Checks ............................................................................................................................... 2
1.3 Annual Checks....................................................................................................................................... 3
2. MAINTENANCE OF THE BATTERY............................................................................................................. 3
2.1 Monthly Checks ..................................................................................................................................... 3
2.2 Annual Checks....................................................................................................................................... 4
2.3 Battery Capacity Test ............................................................................................................................ 4

Rev. Description of change Original document #: 7RA9090GB Issued Validated Approved Date
05 New Design mp RST LUS 13-08-22
06 New Ideograms / New buttons and display pictures / New panel mp LUS BKI 14-02-27

Please note:
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means — electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording — for whatever reason, without the explicit written
permission of GUTOR Electronic LLC

7RA9090GB: Rev.06 Page 1 / 4


Maintenance

Due to the critical intended purpose and to ensure the safe and reliable operation of the equipment,
inspection and preventive maintenance are essential.

To perform a proper maintenance on our UPS systems it is adivisable to have participated on a


training course. We also provides global service contracts to guarantuee a maximum availability of
the system therefore please refer to the description «Service-Training-Contact
Addresses».

For the checks listed below a brief report/checklist shall be issued where all findings are
documented. These records must be available in case of a warranty claim.

Please read the «Safety regulations» thoroughly before performing any


manipulations on the installation.

1. MAINTENANCE OF THE UPS SYSTEM


1.1 Monthly Checks
The following checks should be made monthly:

1. Check the inverter output voltage by means of a measuring instrument.

2. Check the battery voltage by means of a measuring instrument.

3. Check the inverter output current by means of a measuring instrument.

4. Persisting alarm indications or incorrect operating statuses must be recorded. Subsequently,

reset the alarms by pressing the button C and make sure that the UPS operates

correctly and no alarm of the «Alarm indications» is any longer pending.

5. Press the button «LAMP TEST». All operating status and alarm indications must

illuminate as long as the button is pressed.

1.2 Semiannual Checks


The following checks should be made semi-annually:

1. Monthly checks as above.

2. Read out the event log and analyse it. In case of irregularities which can not be explained,
kindly contact our support.

3. Visual inspection of the system (without turning off the system)

4. Only for systems with filter mats:


Check whether the filter mats are dirty. In the case of strong contamination the filter mats
must be replaced. (A strong contamination results in a reduction of velocity of air, necessary
for the ventilation of the system, and thus sufficient cooling is no longer ensured).

5. Job preparations for annual maintenance depending on the findings.

7RA9090GB: Rev.06 Page 2 / 4


Maintenance

1.3 Annual Checks


1. Monthly & semiannual checks as above.

Switch off the entire system according to the description


«Starting — Switching over — Stopping».

2. In case of strong contamination clean the system from dust.


Don’t use any liquid for cleaning — only vacuum cleaner !

3. Only for systems with bypass stabilizer:


Check in accordance with the maintenance instructions of «Description of the single-phase /
three-phase bypas mains voltage stablizier T090».

4. Recommendations of OEM (Original Equipment Manufacturer) shall be followed regarding


annual maintenance.

5. Functional check of the entire system shall be performed.

2. MAINTENANCE OF THE BATTERY


During operation the battery capacity and the life-span can be influenced by several processes as:
♦ Corrosion
♦ Grid growth
♦ Ripple effects
♦ Sulphation
♦ Passivation
♦ Short circuit
♦ none or excessive cycling
♦ Deep discharge
♦ Wrong battery room temperature
♦ Operation with low electrolyte
♦ Gradual changes in active material
♦ Normal aging

This only to name a few influencing factors.

Detailed corresponding data for the maintenance of the battery see the information given
by the battery manufacturer in «Battery documentation».

2.1 Monthly Checks


The following checks should be performed at the same time as the monthly checks of the
UPS system:

1. Check the battery voltage at the battery.

2. Check all wet battery cells on the liquid level and if necessary refill ( see «Battery
documentation»).

3. Check the voltage of each individual cell (in the case of wet battery cells additionally the
specific gravity) of the «pilot cells» ( see «Battery documentation»).

7RA9090GB: Rev.06 Page 3 / 4


Maintenance

2.2 Annual Checks


1. Annually the cell covers must be cleaned and if necessary the poles and links must also be
cleaned (possible corrosion) and slightly greased.

2. Check the starting torque of the pole screws.

3. Check the battery with the rectifier switched on. Measure and record the voltage of each cell.
In the case of wet cells additionally the specific gravity must be checked and recorded.

4. Perform a nominal battery discharge test according to the manufacturer’s recommendation (


see «Battery documentation»). The discharge test records should at least contain:
All cell voltages, discharge current, overall battery voltage, ambient temperature and
discharge time. If wet cells are used it would also include the specific gravity as well as the
electrolyte temperature of pilot cells.

2.3 Battery Capacity Test


The battery capacity test gives an information about how long the battery backup time is at actual
load. The performance of a battery capacity test only make sense, when the batteries are fully
charged and the rectifier is running in float charge.

At the end of this check the capacity of the battery is low. If at this time a mains failure
occurs, it will have a direct influence on the emergency current time (autonomy time).
Therefore, this check must be co-ordinated with the personnel (e.g. operator of the
connected load). Nevertheless, the test should not be foregone because it provides
the best information on the condition of the batteries.

1. Start with fully charged batteries, i.e. if the system has been in normal operation for longer
than 8 hours.

2. For testing the battery capacity from the Foil keypad proceed as follows: push and

step inside the stack with the cursor key or until: is

shown on the display, where «xxx» is the back-up time of the last test — if not performed
before or if the test has been aborted, «???» is shown.
1

3. Push to abort or to continue. The display shows: ,

where «time > …min.» is only shown if option «Advanced battery monitor» is installed.

4. Wait until the display shows: and a short alarm has been activated.

5. Push and until the display shows , where «xxx» is the

actual back-up time in minutes.

6. Push or wait 30secs until the display shows: .

If during the test a mains fault occurs, the test will immediately be aborted and no test result will be
obtained. When reading out data of the battery capacity test in the display after a test has been
aborted, «???» is shown, i.e. that no result was obtained

Please note that after a battery capacity test it will take about 8...24 hours before the battery is
recharged and the full back-up time is available again.

7RA9090GB: Rev.06 Page 4 / 4


Gutor PxW
Replacement of Components and Parts

Contents
10YEAR EXTENDED REPLACEMENT SCHEDULE ........................................................................................ 2
OPTIONS ........................................................................................................................................................... 3

Rev. Description of change Original document #: 7RA9091GB Issued Validated Approved Date
02 D098 and Chipset deleted / New design mp MDR LUS 13-08-22

Please note:
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means — electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording — for whatever reason, without the explicit written
permission of GUTOR Electronic LLC

7RA9091GB: Rev.02 Page 1 / 3


Replacement of Components and Parts

As a minimum we specifies that the following components and parts in the UPS systems are
replaced according to the time periods indicated:

Reference Normal NPP Replacement


Part Designator Scope Scope Cycle
Fan Sub-assembly E0.. X X 5 years
Battery Bank — X X Note 1 + 2
Backup RAM with Lithium Battery A070 X X 9 years
DC Capacitor Module CB02 X X 9 years
AC Capacitor Module CB03 X X 9 years
Air Filter — X X Note 3

Normal scope: Stationary on-shore installation with non-seismic requirements


Harsh environment: Installation in Nuclear Power Plants, seismic requirements, off-shore- or
mobile application

These values refer to a maximum ambient temperature of 40° Celsius and a maximum load of 70%.
If one of these values is continuously exceeded, the items mentioned must be replaced 1 year
earlier.

Note 1: See battery specification of the battery manufacturer.

Note 2: With enabled battery monitor (option) the battery is automatically monitored.
In the case of a faulty battery an alarm is generated.

Note 3: The air filters must be checked at least every 6 months. Dependent on the
contamination they must be replaced immediately.

10year Extended Replacement Schedule


Reference Normal NPP Replacement
Part Designator Scope Scope Cycle Remarks
Main Controller A070 X X 10 years
Master Logic A701 X X 10 years if applicable
SC-Controller A072 X X 10 years if applicable
Display-Unit (Frontpanel) A073 X X 10 years
External Connection Board A025 X 10 years
PSU AC A201 X X 10 years
PSU DC A202 X X 10 years
Parallel Controller Board A024 X X 10 years parallel operation
Rectifier Module A030 X 10 years
12-pulse Rectifier Module A031 X 10 years if applicable
Static Switch Module EN A035 X 10 years
Static Switch Module EA A036 X 10 years if applicable
Inverter Power Module A032 X 10 years
Inverter Power Module A033 X 10 years if applicable
Inverter Power Module A034 X 10 years if applicable
DC Current Sensor P007 X 10 years
DC Current Sensor P009 X 10 years

7RA9091GB: Rev.02 Page 2 / 3


Replacement of Components and Parts

Options
Normal NPP Replacement
Part Scope Scope Cycle Remarks
Harmonic Filters X X 10 years
Static Transfer Switch X X 10 years
TDS X X 10 years according specific instructions
AC/DC Converter X X 10 years
DC/DC Converter X X 10 years

Replacement cycle intervals may be shorter and the scope may need to be extended if the
system is exposed to harsh environmental conditions (vibration, climate, air-pollution).

Consult us for an appropriate schedule in this case.

7RA9091GB: Rev.02 Page 3 / 3


Gutor PxW, PXP and WxW
Service — Training — Contact Addresses

Contents
1. SERVICE/REPAIRS ....................................................................................................................................... 2
1.1 Service Contract .................................................................................................................................... 2
1.2 Call for After Sales Service and Return of Parts ................................................................................... 3
1.3 Installation and Commissioning ............................................................................................................. 3
1.4 Maintenance .......................................................................................................................................... 4
1.4.1 Tailored Maintenance Packages ....................................................................................................... 4
2. SPARE PARTS .............................................................................................................................................. 4
3. TRAINING ...................................................................................................................................................... 5
3.1 Level 1: Operation ............................................................................................................................. 5
3.2 Level 1-2: Maintenance ..................................................................................................................... 6
3.3 Level 1-3: Service .............................................................................................................................. 6
4. CONTACT ADDRESSES ............................................................................................................................... 6

Rev. Description of change Original document #: 7RA9092GB Issued Validated Approved Date
05 New Design mp FME LUS 13-08-22

Please note:
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means — electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording — for whatever reason, without the explicit written
permission of GUTOR Electronic LLC

7RA9092GB: Rev.05 Page 1 / 7


Service — Training — Contact Addresses

1. SERVICE/REPAIRS
1.1 Service Contract
What is a service contract?
A service contract is a formal, mutually agreed, binding contract between our Company and a
client, in which we make a commitment to provide services over a fixed time period, and at fixed
rates / yearly fee. These services include technical support, preventive maintenance and repair.

Which service contracts are available?


We offer three standard service contracts. These are:
♦ «call-off» service contract
♦ «preventive-plus» service contract
♦ «preventive-ultra» service contract

Each contract entails a different degree of commitment. For further information, refer to the table
below.

Benefits of having a service contract


A service contract is beneficial in more than one way, including:
♦ Peace of mind
♦ Knowledgeable service
♦ Continuous customer support
♦ Reduced risk of system failure
♦ Easy budgeting for customers
♦ Easy organization of maintenance
♦ Facilitated access to site (annual site passes and security permits)
♦ Prompt sales response time
♦ Prompt service response time
♦ Special service and training rates
♦ Professional recommendations made by the OEM (new products, upgrades…)
♦ Client’s maintenance crew stays up-to-date with operational know-how
♦ Warranty extensions (optional)

call- preventive preventive


Scope of work off plus ultra
customer support
24/7 hotline   
technical support   
preventive maintenance
annual visual check of system and battery   
annual mechanical check of system and battery   
annual alarms and LED check   
annual replacement of parts with limited operational life-time (if   
applicable)
including the required parts (fans, capacitors, RAM2 and PSU)   
battery dischange test   
including rental of load-bank   
corrective maintenance
troubleshooting and repair services (upon request)   
spare parts required for repair or stock (upon request)   
additional items
sales reponse time (up to 72 hours)   
service reponse time (up to 72 hours)   
software updates (to latest revision)   
upgrades (network management card, battery monitoring, etc)   

 product or service included in annual fee


 product or service performed upon request, at additional cost, offered on a case by case basis

7RA9092GB: Rev.05 Page 2 / 7


Service — Training — Contact Addresses

1.2 Call for After Sales Service and Return of Parts


Label «Return of Parts»:

This label contains all necessary information for the return of parts or for contacting our service
department. It is adhered behind the front door near the name plate.

The necessary information to call for service action are mentioned on the name plate.

1.3 Installation and Commissioning


What is Installation & Commissioning ?
This process ensures the correct installation and functionality of UPS systems and their
corresponding batteries.

It includes the following procedures:


♦ Visual inspection of the UPS location and its environment
♦ Visual inspection of the UPS system and battery banks
♦ Inspection of all UPS power and control wiring connections
♦ Inspection of all battery wiring connections

7RA9092GB: Rev.05 Page 3 / 7


Service — Training — Contact Addresses

♦ Inspection of internal power and communication components


♦ Performing system checks, recording input and output measurements
♦ Discharging the battery bank and recording voltage measurements on an individual cell basis
♦ If necessary, some calibration adjustments are performed to adapt to site conditions

Why request a Engineer of our Company ?


♦ Secure the continuity of our guarantee and guarantee extension
♦ Guarantee becomes void when defects are due to improperly performed service by
unauthorized parties
♦ Engineers or our Company are well trained and certified specialists with years of experience in
this field
♦ Engineers or our Company will maintain high quality and globally approved standards
♦ Proper documentation, such as the Site Acceptance Test and Customer Field Service Reports
♦ System is stored in our database, which facilitates future troubleshooting and technical support
♦ Offer hands-on training to site crew and maintenance personnel responsible for these systems

1.4 Maintenance
Maintenance covers several important aspects which have a deep impact on the availability and
reliability of the entire system and the plant it services. The aspects of maintenance are divided in:

Preventive Maintenance
The concept of preventive maintenance comprises planned maintenance tasks. Their purpose is to
minimize breakdowns, excessive depreciation of the system and to maximize availability and
reliability during the entire life span. The individual preventive maintenance jobs are performed
according to the system maintenance manual and the OEM maintenance checklist. Preventive
maintenance requires adequately-trained and experienced manpower, replacements of those parts
with limited lifetime, tools and instruments to perform the respective work.

Corrective Maintenance
Preventive maintenance cannot prevent a breakdown that is caused by external influences,
operational error or a part failure. If an unexpected breakdown occurs it is important that the system
is repaired, tested and brought back to operation immediately.

Spare part Stocking


The successful performance of corrective maintenance requires the availability of critical parts and
components.

Hard and software updates


During the life of a system new features are being developed. Their implementation, or the
replacements of outdated parts make older systems more reliable.

Response time for Services and Material


Adequate response time is an important factor when it comes to remedial services.

Hotline Services
For operational questions, remote advice, or the request of a field service engineer (FSE).

1.4.1 Tailored Maintenance Packages


We have bundled above maintenance aspects into three professional packages to cover individual
customer requirements ranging from minimum service, to absolute peace of mind. You choose the
package that suits your requirements. See section 1.1

7RA9092GB: Rev.05 Page 4 / 7


Service — Training — Contact Addresses

2. SPARE PARTS
Our UPS systems have proven time and again to last as long as 20 years. We achieve this
performance by offering clients spare parts throughout this period. Spare parts are categorized into
three groups: start-up, critical, and consumables spares as described in this section. Accordingly,
we highly recommend clients to maintain a stock of the start-up and critical spare parts, for the
benefits listed here.

What are spare parts ?


Spare parts are inventory items which are used for the repair or replacement of failed parts.

Which spare parts are required ?


Spare parts fall under three major categories:
♦ Start-up spares: set of recommended fuses and parts to be available during commissioning
♦ Critical spares: set of parts recommended for stock, which are essential for troubleshooting and
repair. These parts would cause a system shutdown upon failure
♦ Consumables: set of parts having a limited operational life, which must be replaced at specific
intervals. These are related to preventive maintenance and include fans, capacitors, RAM2
chips, batteries, power supply units, etc
♦ For more information, refer to chapter 7 of your owner’s manual

What are the benefits ?


♦ Downtime of a faulty system can be minimized
♦ Maintenance planners’ work load can be reduced
♦ Round the clock peace of mind concerning operation
♦ Inventory replenishment can be reduced

The selection of the correct spare parts is crucial. We gladly support you in defining the spare parts
needed taking in consideration of your installed systems and requirements.

3. TRAINING
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) systems from us are designed according to individual
customer needs. Technical staff servicing and maintaining these systems therefore receive
customized training based on specific requirements in relation to those particular systems installed
on-site. We offer three different training levels concerning operation, maintenance, and service
respectively. Each training course, as well as the documentation, are individually tailored based on
the customer's installed fleet.

What are the benefits ?


The life time of an UPS System can be extended, and the failure rate can be reduced, if the system
is well maintained. Information on how to operate and maintain a system will be provided during a
training course. Furthermore, our Technical Support can handle a malfunction request quicker and
more efficiently if the person on-site is trained. We offer the following training courses:

3.1 Level 1: Operation


This course is comprised of two parts. The first theoretical part introduces the participants to the
various system operating modes and provides information on how the system is built. In the second
hands-on part, the training instructor demonstrates to the participants how to operate the system in
a safe and confident.

7RA9092GB: Rev.05 Page 5 / 7


Service — Training — Contact Addresses

3.2 Level 1-2: Maintenance


Participants learn the important functions of the major UPS components. They also receive
information regarding maintenance work and maintenance intervals. Upon completion of this
course, participants are capable of resolving minor system errors.

3.3 Level 1-3: Service


Level 1–3 provides the training participants with instruction on how to analyze and clear system
errors. In addition, the training instructor explains how the system can be calibrated. Upon
completion of this course, participants are capable of performing most repair and maintenance work
by themselves.

For detailed description please contact our customer service

4. CONTACT ADDRESSES
Global service organization
We recognize the importance of a global service network to support our globally operating
customers. As a member of the Schneider Electric group, we provide you with a worldwide service
network, an inventory of readily available spare parts, and trained service partners. For more details
regarding our service programs, please contact the our Service Centre nearest to you, as listed
below.

Headquarter switzerland
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Hardstrasse 72 – 74
5430 Wettingen, Switzerland
P +41 (0)56 437 34 34
F +41 (0)56 437 34 21
gutor-service-ch@schneider-electric.com

ASIA PACIFIC:
GUTOR Electronic Asia Pacific Sdn Bhd
No. 19, Jln Juruukur U1/19, Seksyen U1
Hicom Glenmarie Industrial Park,
40150 Shah Alam, Selangor, Malaysia
P +(6) 03 5569 0331
F +(6) 03 5569 0332
gutor-service-my@schneider-electric.com

North and South America:


GUTOR Electronic LLC
12121 Wickchester Lane, Suite 400
Houston, Texas 77079, USA
P 281 588 2145
F 859 962 4593
gutor-service-us@schneider-electric.com

7RA9092GB: Rev.05 Page 6 / 7


Service — Training — Contact Addresses

Middle East:
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Villa No.2, Defence Road,St.11,
Behind Gava Hotel,
P.O.Box 29580, Abu Dhabi, U.A.E.
P +971 (0)2 443 89 93
F +971 (0)2 443 89 92
gutor-service-ae@schneider-electric.com

Saudi Arabia:
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Middle East Commercial Complex
AL-Khobar 31952
P.O.Box. 79575, Saudi Arabia
P +966 (0)3 864 9667
F +966 (0)3 864 9062
gutor-service-sa@schneider-electric.com

Russia
The Gutor by Schneider Hotline number is: 8-800-200-6446

Please dial 0 for technical consultation, then the Customer Care Center specialist will connect you
to Gutor by Schneider engineer.

The hotline is open Monday to Friday 8am – 6 pm (Outside business hours please call our Hotline
in Switzerland: +41 56 437 6263)

7RA9092GB: Rev.05 Page 7 / 7


.
.
.

ÍÛÎÊ×ÝÛ ‰ ÌÎß×Ò×ÒÙ ‰ ÝÑÒÌßÝÌ ßÜÜÎÛÍÍÛÍ Page 7 / 7 7RA9092GB: Rev.04

NORTH AND SOUTH AMERICA:


GUTOR Electronic LLC
12121 Wickchester Lane, Suite 400
Houston, Texas 77079, USA
P 281 588 2145
F 859 962 4593
gutor-service-us@schneider-electric.com

MIDDLE EAST:

CHAPTER 8
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Villa No.2, Defence Road,St.11,
Behind Gava Hotel,
P.O.Box 29580, Abu Dhabi, U.A.E.
P +971 (0)2 443 89 93
F +971 (0)2 443 89 92
gutor-service-ae@schneider-electric.com

TROUBLE-SHOOTING
SAUDI ARABIA:
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Middle East Commercial Complex
AL-Khobar 31952
P.O.Box. 79575, Saudi Arabia
P +966 (0)3 864 9667
F +966 (0)3 864 9062
gutor-service-sa@schneider-electric.com

RUSSIA
The GUTOR by Schneider Hotline number is: 8-800-200-6446

Please dial 0 for technical consultation, then the Customer Care Center specialist will connect you
to GUTOR by Schneider engineer.

The hotline is open Monday to Friday 8am – 6 pm (Outside business hours please call our GUTOR
Hotline in Switzerland: +41 56 437 6263)

© GUTOR Electronic LLC CH-5430 Wettingen Switzerland


Gutor PxW
Trouble Shooting

Contents
1. ELIMINATION OF SIMPLE MALFUNCTIONS .............................................................................................. 2
2. TROUBLE-SHOOTING AT ALARM INDICATION ........................................................................................ 2

Rev. Description of change Original document #: 7RA9093GB Issued Validated Approved Date
01 First edition mp CHN LUS 15-06-29

Please note:
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means — electronic or
mechanical, including photocopying and recording — for whatever reason, without the explicit written
permission of GUTOR Electronic LLC

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 1 / 5


Trouble Shooting

Depending upon the system configuration, the switches mentioned in this description can be circuit breakers, switch-disconnectors (fuse switch-
disconnectors) and the designation can be made according to customer's request see «Single line diagram».

1. ELIMINATION OF SIMPLE MALFUNCTIONS


DISTURBANCE REASON

Rectifier doesn't start • Rectifier input switch Q001 open


• Rectifier mains voltage out of tolerance or wrong phase sequence
• Overtemperature signalization of rectifier power components
• Supply voltage for the electronics fails or is out of tolerance
• Plug connection of the electronics to the rectifier bridge
Inverter doesn't start • DC voltage out of tolerance
• Supply voltage for the electronics fails or is out of tolerance
• Overtemperature signalization of inverter power components
• Plug connection of the electronics to the PM sets

2. TROUBLE SHOOTING AT ALARM INDICATION

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 2 / 5


Trouble Shooting

Alarm Indication Alarm #: / Error in the System Source of Error Test Possibilities Location
RECTIFIER MAINS FAULT 40: Mains Phase rotation error ♦ Wrong wiring ♦ Check phase order ♦ Interface A071: X003, F001, F002,
(30 s) F003
41: Mains voltage out of tolerance ♦ Input voltage out of tolerance ♦ Check voltages ♦ Input connector X001
♦ Input switch Q001 open ♦ Check input switch Q001
39: Mains frequency fault ♦ Input frequency out of tolerance ♦ Check frequency ♦ Input switch Q001
RECTIFIER FAILURE No “RECT MAINS FAULT” and:
(5 s)
36: Low DC warning or ♦ DC Load too high ♦ Check DC load ♦ DC Bus
37: Low DC shutdown or ♦ System OFF (also due to shutdown) or System in ♦ Check operation mode and evaluate
standby shutdown cause (Log stack)
♦ Rectifier or PSU faulty
♦ Check current ripple (6-pulse: 300/360Hz, ♦ Input switch Q001
12-pulse: 600/720Hz)
♦ Check PSU LED's ♦ Controller A070
(PSU_OK_AC/PSU_OK_DC)
23: Charger 30 temp shutdown or
Charger modul A030/A31
21: Charger 0 temp shutdown
DC OUT OF TOLERANCE 27: High DC shutdown ♦ Rectifier out of operation ♦ Measure the DC voltage ♦ Battery
(5 s) 37: Low DC shutdown ♦ Battery discharged / disconnected ♦ Measure the battery voltage ♦ Interface A071 / X017: F022/F023
♦ DC has exceeded «High DC warning level» ♦ Controller A070
♦ DC dropped below «Low DC warning level»
BATTERY OPERATION ♦ Rectifier failure ♦ Check the mains input ♦ Rectifier input switch Q001
(30 s) ♦ Inverter supplied from the battery ♦ Interface A071/ X007: F001/F002/F003

BATTERY DISCHARGED 11: Battery monitor warning ♦ Rectifier out of operation ♦ Measure DC voltage ♦ Rectifier
(5 s) 36: Low DC warning ♦ Battery disconnected ♦ Check Battery switch ♦ Battery switchInterface A071/ X017:
♦ DC voltage dropped to the lower alarm level. F022/F023
BATT. DISCONNECTED 15: Battery switch Off ♦ Breaker open or auxiliary contact not connected ♦ Check breaker and auxiliary contacts ♦ Battery
(5 s) ♦ Q004 (Q005), X002
♦ External Connection Board A025:
X004:1 and X004:2
DC EARTH FAULT ♦ One of the battery poles is connected to earth ♦ Isolate the battery ♦ Battery
(5secs) ♦ Check earth fault resistors ♦ Earth fault resistor board A014

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 3 / 5


Trouble Shooting

Alarm Indication Alarm #: / Error in the System Source of Error Test Possibilities Location
INVERTER FAULT 6: Power Module 1 shutdown ♦ Over temperature on inverter power units ♦ Check temperature of power modules and ♦ Fuse F021 (F022... F023)
8: Power Module 2 shutdown ♦ Inverter fuse blown output magnetics ♦ Interface A071
(5 s)
10: Power Module 3 shutdown ♦ Controller A070
♦ Fans
OVERLOAD INV./BYPASS 25: Overload: load is >100% ♦ Load current higher than the nominal current of ♦ Measure the load current ♦ Current transformer P013 (P014...P015)
the system ♦ Interface A071 / X014
(30 s)
INVERTER FUSE BLOWN 35: Inverter fuse blown ♦ Power fuse F021 (F022... F023) ♦ Check the fuse F021 (F022... F023) ♦ Fuse F021 (F022... F023)
(5 s) ♦ Interface A071 / X003

ASYNCHRONOUS 51: Synchronisation error ♦ Bypass frequency out of tolerance ♦ Measure the voltage between bypass and ♦ Controller A070
♦ Inverter asynchronous to the bypass mains system output ♦ Interface A071
(30 s)
BYPASS MAINS FAULT 16: Bypass frequency out of tolerance ♦ Bypass mains voltage or frequency out of ♦ Measure the bypass mains voltage and ♦ Interface A071/ X010: F006/F007/F008
18: Bypass is out of tolerance tolerance frequency at the input of the static switch
(30 s)
EN
MANUAL BYPASS ON 4: System set in manual BYPASS ♦ Manual bypass switch Q050 not at position ♦ Check the position of manual bypass ♦ Manual bypass switch Q050
«AUTO» switch Q050 ♦ Adapter board A068
(5 s)
EN INHIBITED 16: Bypass frequency out of tolerance ♦ Bypass mains voltage or -frequency out of ♦ Measure the bypass mains voltage ♦ Static switch EN — A035
18: Bypass is out of tolerance tolerance ♦ Measure the bypass voltage after F028 ♦ Controller A070
(30 s)
47: Static Switch EN temp shutdown ♦ Over temperature on the static switch EN (F029...F030) ♦ Interface A071/ X010: F006/F007/F008

OVERTEMPERATURE 5: Power Module 1 temp warning ♦ Heat-sink of the power components too hot ♦ Measure the temperature ♦ Thermostats on power components and
7: Power Module 2 temp warning ♦ Winding material too hot ♦ Check the air flow through the system wiring material
(5 s)
9: Power Module 3 temp warning ♦ Too high ambient temperature ♦ Interface A071
32: High temperature inverter magnetics ♦ Air inlet obstructed
48: Static Switch EN temp warning
FAN FAILURE 54: Fan fault ♦ Fans ♦ Check the air flow ♦ Fan monitoring A055 / A056 : Interface
♦ Fan monitoring board (A055 / A056) ♦ Check the power supply A071 / X004
(30 s)
♦ Fan transformer (T051 / T052) ♦ Fan disconnection ♦ Fan transformers (T051 / T052)
♦ Power supply for the fans ♦ Interface A071 / X025...X030:
F016...F021
POWER SUPPLY FAULT 55: Fault in internal power supply ♦ Power supply units : PSU A201 / A202 ♦ Measure the output voltage of the PSU’s ♦ PSU-Transformer T005 : Interface A071
♦ AC or DC power supply sources ♦ Measure the DC supply voltage to PSU 2 / X021 : F004/F005
(5 s)
♦ Interface A071 A202 at X003 ♦ PSU-Transformer T004 : Interface A071
♦ Measure the AC supply voltage to PSU 1 / X022 : F006/F007
A201 at T005 : X001 and T004 : X002 ♦ PSU 2 A202 : Interface A071 / X032 :
F026/F027

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 4 / 5


Trouble Shooting

Alarm Indication Alarm #: / Error in the System Source of Error Test Possibilities Location
120/240V DIST. TRAFO T100 Option 3 ♦ Output transformer ♦ Check transformer temperature ♦ T100
OVERTEMPERATURE ♦ Output transformer overtemperature sensor ♦ Adapter board A068

(5 s)

4A-1150079001/20GB: Rev.01 Page 5 / 5


.
.
.

ÍÛÎÊ×ÝÛ ‰ ÌÎß×Ò×ÒÙ ‰ ÝÑÒÌßÝÌ ßÜÜÎÛÍÍÛÍ Page 7 / 7 7RA9092GB: Rev.04

NORTH AND SOUTH AMERICA:


GUTOR Electronic LLC
12121 Wickchester Lane, Suite 400
Houston, Texas 77079, USA
P 281 588 2145
F 859 962 4593
gutor-service-us@schneider-electric.com

MIDDLE EAST:

CHAPTER 9
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Villa No.2, Defence Road,St.11,
Behind Gava Hotel,
P.O.Box 29580, Abu Dhabi, U.A.E.
P +971 (0)2 443 89 93
F +971 (0)2 443 89 92
gutor-service-ae@schneider-electric.com

TEST DOCUMENTATION
SAUDI ARABIA:
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Middle East Commercial Complex
AL-Khobar 31952
P.O.Box. 79575, Saudi Arabia
P +966 (0)3 864 9667
F +966 (0)3 864 9062
gutor-service-sa@schneider-electric.com

RUSSIA
The GUTOR by Schneider Hotline number is: 8-800-200-6446

Please dial 0 for technical consultation, then the Customer Care Center specialist will connect you
to GUTOR by Schneider engineer.

The hotline is open Monday to Friday 8am – 6 pm (Outside business hours please call our GUTOR
Hotline in Switzerland: +41 56 437 6263)

© GUTOR Electronic LLC CH-5430 Wettingen Switzerland


.
.
.

ÍÛÎÊ×ÝÛ ‰ ÌÎß×Ò×ÒÙ ‰ ÝÑÒÌßÝÌ ßÜÜÎÛÍÍÛÍ Page 7 / 7 7RA9092GB: Rev.04

NORTH AND SOUTH AMERICA:


GUTOR Electronic LLC
12121 Wickchester Lane, Suite 400
Houston, Texas 77079, USA
P 281 588 2145
F 859 962 4593
gutor-service-us@schneider-electric.com

MIDDLE EAST:

CHAPTER 10
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Villa No.2, Defence Road,St.11,
Behind Gava Hotel,
P.O.Box 29580, Abu Dhabi, U.A.E.
P +971 (0)2 443 89 93
F +971 (0)2 443 89 92
gutor-service-ae@schneider-electric.com

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS /
SAUDI ARABIA:

PARTS LIST / SPARE


GUTOR Electronic LLC
Middle East Commercial Complex
AL-Khobar 31952
P.O.Box. 79575, Saudi Arabia

PARTS LIST
P +966 (0)3 864 9667
F +966 (0)3 864 9062
gutor-service-sa@schneider-electric.com

RUSSIA
The GUTOR by Schneider Hotline number is: 8-800-200-6446

Please dial 0 for technical consultation, then the Customer Care Center specialist will connect you
to GUTOR by Schneider engineer.

The hotline is open Monday to Friday 8am – 6 pm (Outside business hours please call our GUTOR
Hotline in Switzerland: +41 56 437 6263)

© GUTOR Electronic LLC CH-5430 Wettingen Switzerland


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A

B B
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

DOCUMENT TITLE : 1150079001/00


1150079002/00
C C

CLIENT : VOLTA LLC

D
PROJECT NAME : EXTERRAN UPS SYSTEM
D

P. O. : 48652

E
APPLICABLE FOR : E

TAG NUMBER : TYPE :


PEW 1030-125/240-EN
PEW 1030-125/240-EN

F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
GENERAL DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 COVER SHEET 1150079001/00 00 1/ 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TABLE OF CONTENTS REVISION STATUS


A A
CHAPTER CHAPTER DESCRIPTION PAGE PAGE DESCRIPTION NO. DATE DRAWN DESCRIPTION
00 GENERAL 1 COVER SHEET 2 21.07.15 GRM
00 GENERAL 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS 2 21.07.15 GRM MODIFIED
01 LAYOUT 1 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT 2 21.07.15 GRM
01 LAYOUT 2 SOCKET DETAIL 2 21.07.15 GRM
01 LAYOUT 3 FRONTVIEW - CONTROL AND MONITORING 2 21.07.15 GRM MODIFIED
01 LAYOUT 4 NAMEPLATES AND LIST OF LABELS 2 21.07.15 GRM
01 LAYOUT 5 NAMEPLATES AND LIST OF LABELS 2 21.07.15 GRM
B 01 LAYOUT 6 NAMEPLATES AND LIST OF LABELS 2 21.07.15 GRM B
01 LAYOUT 7 INSTRUMENTS 2 21.07.15 GRM
03 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM 1 UPS 2 21.07.15 GRM
03 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM 2 LEGEND 2 21.07.15 GRM
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

04 CONNECTION DIAGRAM 1 LEGEND 2 21.07.15 GRM


04 CONNECTION DIAGRAM 2 EXTERNAL CONNECTION BOARD -A025 2 21.07.15 GRM
04 CONNECTION DIAGRAM 3 RELAY BOARD -A077 2 21.07.15 GRM
04 CONNECTION DIAGRAM 4 MAINS INPUT -X001 2 21.07.15 GRM
04 CONNECTION DIAGRAM 5 BATTERY CONNECTION -X002 2 21.07.15 GRM
C 04 CONNECTION DIAGRAM 6 AC LOAD -X004 2 21.07.15 GRM C
04 CONNECTION DIAGRAM 7 BYPASS MAINS INPUT -X090 2 21.07.15 GRM
05 WIRING DIAGRAM 1 UPS 2 21.07.15 GRM MODIFIED
05 WIRING DIAGRAM 2 UPS 2 21.07.15 GRM
05 WIRING DIAGRAM 3 UPS 2 21.07.15 GRM
05 WIRING DIAGRAM 4 UPS 2 21.07.15 GRM
05 WIRING DIAGRAM 5 UPS 2 21.07.15 GRM
05 WIRING DIAGRAM 6 UPS 2 21.07.15 GRM
05 WIRING DIAGRAM 7 UPS 2 21.07.15 GRM MODIFIED
D 05 WIRING DIAGRAM 8 UPS 2 21.07.15 GRM MODIFIED D
05 WIRING DIAGRAM 9 UPS 2 21.07.15 GRM
05 WIRING DIAGRAM 10 UPS 2 21.07.15 GRM
05 WIRING DIAGRAM 11 UPS 2 21.07.15 GRM
05 WIRING DIAGRAM 12 UPS 2 21.07.15 GRM
05 WIRING DIAGRAM 13 UPS 2 21.07.15 GRM
05 WIRING DIAGRAM 14 UPS 2 21.07.15 GRM MODIFIED
05 WIRING DIAGRAM 15 UPS 2 21.07.15 GRM
05 WIRING DIAGRAM 16 UPS 2 21.07.15 GRM MODIFIED
E 05 WIRING DIAGRAM 17 UPS 2 21.07.15 GRM E
05 WIRING DIAGRAM 18 UPS 2 21.07.15 GRM
05 WIRING DIAGRAM 19 UPS 2 21.07.15 GRM
05 WIRING DIAGRAM 20 UPS 2 21.07.15 GRM
05 WIRING DIAGRAM 21 UPS 2 21.07.15 GRM
07 WIRING DIAGRAM 1 BYPASS / INCOMING 2 21.07.15 GRM MODIFIED
07 WIRING DIAGRAM 2 BYPASS / INCOMING 2 21.07.15 GRM
07 WIRING DIAGRAM 3 BYPASS / INCOMING 2 21.07.15 GRM MODIFIED
07 WIRING DIAGRAM 4 BYPASS / INCOMING 2 21.07.15 GRM MODIFIED
F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 MODIFIED 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
GENERAL DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS 1150079001/00 00 2 / 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
UPS BYPASS / INCOMING
LIFTING EYES LIFTING EYES CABLE GLAND PLATE
RECOMMENDED 500 [19.69]

A 1800 [70.87] 1800 [70.87] A


ANALOG
1) 2) 1) METER
TERMINALS
TERMINALS TERMINALS

PHASE SELECTOR
SWITCH

HMI FRONT
LABEL LEGEND:
1) SYSTEM LABEL
B B
2) SCHNEIDER LABELS
LOW VOLTAGE CONNECTION

DETAIL, SEE CHAPTER 01 PAGE 4


RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

125 [4.92] 125 [4.92]


AIR INLET AIR INLET
C 0 0 C

27 [1.06] 1150 [45.28] 1150 [45.28] 27 [1.06] 27 [1.06] 750 [29.53] 27 [1.06]

2354 [92.68] 804 [31.65]


(FRONT VIEW) (SIDE VIEW)

CABLE
GLAND PLATE FOR SOCKET DETAIL SEE PAGE 2
D D
750 [29.53]
RECOMMENDED 100 [3.94]

0
E 767 767 E
[30 [30
[1 370
0

.20 .20
37

57

] ]

775 [30.51]

1150 [45.28]

1925 [75.79]

2300 [90.55]
0
4.

FRONT FRONT PROTECTION CLASS : IP20 (NEMA 1)


(TOP VIEW) (BOTTOM VIEW)
COLOUR : ANSI 61
F WEIGHT : 1220 kg [2711 lb] F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN SCALE ISO 128


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC 1 : 20 AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
LAYOUT DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT MM [INCHES] 1150079001/00 01 1/ 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

70 [2.76]
FRONT VIEW
A A

125 [4.93]
A A

A-A
B B
750 [29.55] 750 [29.55]
730 [28.76] 730 [28.76]
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

689 [27.15]

14
6x
C C

479 [18.87] 479 [18.87]

D D

271 [10.68] 271 [10.68]

E E

61 [2.40] 61 [2.40]

20 [0.79] 20 [0.79]
0 [0.00] 0

35 [1.38]

98 [3.86]

98 [3.86]

35 [1.38]
85.5 [3.37]

85.5 [3.37]
0

0
F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN SCALE


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC 1:5 AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
LAYOUT DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 SOCKET DETAIL 1150079001/00 01 2 / 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A
Gutor PxW A

MAINS INPUT BYPASS INPUT

ON
OFF
ON
OFF
DISPLAY
B B

COMMON ALARM
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

ON
7 8 9
OFF SYSTEM ON MAINS DC/
BATTERY
OUTPUT
VOLTAGE VOLTAGE
VOLTAGE
BATTERY ON
C 4 5 6 C
MAINS BATTERY OUTPUT
OFF CURRENT CURRENT CURRENT

OFF 1 2 3
EN INVERTER OUTPUT
CURRENT FREQUENCY
LAMP TEST
0

D C D

RECT. MAINS FAULT BATTERY OPERATION INVERTER FAULT BYPASS MAINS FAULT OVERTEMPERATURE 120/240V DIST. TRAFO T100
OVERTEMPERATURE
E RECT. FAILURE BATTERY DISCHARGED OVERLOAD INV/BYPASS MANUAL BYPASS ON FAN FAILURE E

DC OUT OF TOLERANCE BATTERY DISCONNECTED INVERTER FUSE BLOWN EN INHIBITED POWER SUPPLY FAULT

EARTH FAULT DC ASYNCHRONOUS

F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 MODIFIED 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
LAYOUT DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 FRONTVIEW - CONTROL AND MONITORING 1150079001/00 01 3 / 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SYSTEM RATING PLATE 1150079001/00


A A

100 [3.94] 100 [3.94]

GUTOR Electronic LLC GUTOR Electronic LLC


Wettingen / Switzerland Wettingen / Switzerland
UPS BYPASS / INCOMING

36 [1.42]

36 [1.42]
Type Gutor PEW 1030-125/240-EN No. 1150079001-01 Type Gutor PEW 1030-125/240-EN No. 1150079001-02
B Input 3x480 V 74 A AC 60 Hz 61.4 kVA 51,0 kW Input 3x480 V L1,L3= 37.6
A AC 60 Hz 36.1 kVA 31.3 kW B
ALUMINIUM PLATE ALUMINIUM PLATE L2=75.2
Output 1x240/120 V 125 A AC 60 Hz 30 kVA 24 kW Output 1x240/120 V 125 A AC 60 Hz 30 kVA 24 kW
NEMA 1 IP 20 Year 2015 COUNTRY OF ORIGIN: MADE IN SWITZERLAND NEMA 1 IP 20 Year 2015 COUNTRY OF ORIGIN: MADE IN SWITZERLAND
Refer to Operating Instructions for further details Refer to Operating Instructions for further details
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

C SYSTEM LABEL BLACK LETTERING ON A WHITE BACKGROUND


4628.800
WHITE LETTERING ON A BLACK BACKGROUND
4628.801 C

D
UPS BYPASS / INCOMING D

SCHNEIDER LABEL WHITE LETTERING ON A GREEN BACKGROUND LABELS FOR SWITCH AND ANALOGUE METER BLACK LETTERING ON A WHITE BACKGROUND
__*1__

E E

110 [4.33]

PHASE SELECTOR S091


40 [1.57]

*1 = 4628.701 *1 = 4628.300
*2 = 4628.751 *2 = 4628.350

F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
LAYOUT DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 NAMEPLATES AND LIST OF LABELS 1150079001/00 01 4 / 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SYSTEM RATING PLATE 1150079002/00


A A

100 [3.94] 100 [3.94]

GUTOR Electronic LLC GUTOR Electronic LLC


Wettingen / Switzerland Wettingen / Switzerland
UPS BYPASS / INCOMING

36 [1.42]

36 [1.42]
Type Gutor PEW 1030-125/240-EN No. 1150079002-01 Type Gutor PEW 1030-125/240-EN No. 1150079002-02
B Input 3x480 V 74 A AC 60 Hz 61.4 kVA 51,0 kW Input 3x480 V L1,L3= 37.6
A AC 60 Hz 36.1 kVA 31.3 kW B
ALUMINIUM PLATE ALUMINIUM PLATE L2=75.2
Output 1x240/120 V 125 A AC 60 Hz 30 kVA 24 kW Output 1x240/120 V 125 A AC 60 Hz 30 kVA 24 kW
NEMA 1 IP 20 Year 2015 COUNTRY OF ORIGIN: MADE IN SWITZERLAND NEMA 1 IP 20 Year 2015 COUNTRY OF ORIGIN: MADE IN SWITZERLAND
Refer to Operating Instructions for further details Refer to Operating Instructions for further details
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

C SYSTEM LABEL BLACK LETTERING ON A WHITE BACKGROUND


4628.800
WHITE LETTERING ON A BLACK BACKGROUND
4628.801 C

D
UPS BYPASS / INCOMING D

SCHNEIDER LABEL WHITE LETTERING ON A GREEN BACKGROUND LABELS FOR SWITCH AND ANALOGUE METER BLACK LETTERING ON A WHITE BACKGROUND
__*1__

E E

110 [4.33]

PHASE SELECTOR S091


40 [1.57]

*1 = 4628.701 *1 = 4628.300
*2 = 4628.751 *2 = 4628.350

F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
LAYOUT DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 NAMEPLATES AND LIST OF LABELS 1150079001/00 01 5 / 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SYSTEM LABEL
A A
NAME PLATE FRONT TOP

CAUTION - RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR MAIN INPUT

20
THIS UPS RECEIVES POWER FROM MORE THAN WITH FUSE MAXIMUM 100A AC
ONE SOURCE - DISCONNECTION OF ALL AC SOURCES

40
B AND THE DC SOURCE IS REQUIRED TO DE-ENERGIZE 160 B
THIS UNIT BEFORE SERVICING
ROTER GROUND, WEISSE SCHRIFT
WHITE LETTERING ON A RED BACKGROUND ADHESIVE
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

160

C
WARNING: EXTERNAL PROTECTION FOR BYPASS MAINS C

20

20
MORE THAN ONE LIVE CIRCUIT. SEE DIAGRAM WITH FUSE MAXIMUM L1&L3 50A, L2 100A AC
160 160
ROTER GROUND, WEISSE SCHRIFT ROTER GROUND, WEISSE SCHRIFT
WHITE LETTERING ON A RED BACKGROUND ADHESIVE WHITE LETTERING ON A RED BACKGROUND ADHESIVE

D D

106mm

F021 300A 250V F074 5A 600V


F028 800A 250V F075 5A 600V
F032 630A 700V F083 5A 600V
F034 630A 700V F086 10A 600V
F050 5A 600V F089 5A 600V
56mm

E F051 5A 600V F201 160A 690V E


F066 5A 600V F202 160A 690V
F067 5A 600V F203 160A 690V
F068 5A 600V F204 160A 690V
F069 5A 600V F205 160A 690V
F070 5A 600V F301 80A 600V
F073 5A 600V

ROTER GROUND, WEISSE SCHRIFT


WHITE LETTERING ON A RED BACKGROUND
F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 MODIFIED 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
LAYOUT DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 NAMEPLATES AND LIST OF LABELS 1150079001/00 01 6 / 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

BYPASS / INCOMING
A A

B V B
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

P092

C BYPASS INPUT VOLTAGE C

S091 L1,L2
PH1

L2,L3
OFF PH2

L3,L1
PH3
D D

PHASE SELECTOR

E E

F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
LAYOUT DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 INSTRUMENTS 1150079001/00 01 7 / 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

V/A/F MEASUREMENTS TO BE READ ON THE DISPLAY

BYPASS / INCOMING
A A
50A/4POL 30KVA
-T090
-X090 -Q090
L1,L2,L3

PE

-S091 VS
BYPASS MAINS
3x480V, 60Hz

150A
3PH, 3W

B V -Q050 B

-P092 BYPASS
UPS V
TEST
AUTO
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

800A -A035
V -F028 -K037 EN
-T100 -X004
100A
-X001 -T001 -T002 L1,L2,N
-Q001 -A030 -L001 -A032 -L002 300A PE
L1,L2
C L3 -F021 C
1x240/120V
PE 60Hz 1PH. 3W
30KVA
30KVA PRI: 240V
SEC: 240/120V
3x480V, 60Hz
MAINS INPUT

-CB02 -CB03
3PH, 3W

V/A A A A V V/A/F

D D

-L005

400A
-Q004

B+,B-
-X002 125V DC
E E

BATTERY
60 x GNB 90G15

F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 UPS 1150079001/00 03 1/ 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

12 PULSE TRANSFORMER
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER ANALOGUE METER 27 UNDERVOLTAGE RELAY
6 PULSE TRANSFORMER
A
A A = AMMETER A
GCB V = VOLTMETER
GAS CIRCUIT BREAKER Hz = FREQUENCY METER 37 UNDERCURRENT RELAY

STABILIZER W = WATTMETER
ACB cos = POWER FACTOR METER
AIR CIRCUIT BREAKER 59 OVERVOLTAGE RELAY

A DIGITAL METER
CHOKE A = AMMETER
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKER 51 OVERCURRENT RELAY
V = VOLTMETER
B Hz = FREQUENCY METER B

FUSE DISCONNECTOR SWITCH W = WATTMETER 49 THERMAL RELAY


S SELECTOR SWITCH cos = POWER FACTOR METER
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

LOAD BREAKING SWITCH 25 SYNCHRONIZING CHECK RELAY

CAPACITOR
V/A/F MEASUREMENTS TO BE READ
FUSE SWITCH ON THE DISPLAY ELR EARTH LEAKAGE RELAY
A = AMMETER
C V = VOLTMETER C
Hz = FREQUENCY METER
BLOCKING DIODE
GROUNDING LINK EF EARTH FAULT RELAY

FUSE SCR SYNCHRO CHECK RELAY


VOLTAGE DROPPER RECTIFIER
0.0V 0.8 V 4.0 V

CONTACTOR L1,L2
L3
D TERMINALS INVERTER D
EQUIPMENT CODE
PE
CODE DESCRIPTION
A ASSEMBLIES , VARIOUS BOARDS
BATTERY STATIC SWITCH B SENSOR , FIRE DETECTOR
BYPASS C CAPACITOR , STORAGE DEVICES
TEST F FUSE , PROTECTION DEVICES
AUTO G GENERATOR
I
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE TRANSDUCER H SIGNAL LAMP , LIGHTING
3 POSITION I
E SWITCH K CONTACTOR , RELAY , FILTER E
M MOTOR
P DISPLAY UNIT
EARTH Q SWITCHING DEVICES FOR POWER CIRCUIT
R RESISTOR
S SELECTOR SWITCH , CONTROL SWITCHES
T CONVERTER , TRANSFORMER , TRANSDUCER
W BUS BAR
X TERMINALS , PLUGS
F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 LEGEND 1150079001/00 03 2 / 2
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TERMINAL LEGEND
A A

POWER TERMINAL INFORMATION X001/X002/X004 & X090 DISTRIBUTION TERMINALS INFORMATION CONTROL TERMINALS
CURRENT SIZE TYPE BOLT CABLE DIMENSION CURRENT SIZE TYPE CABLE SIZE TYPE
UP TO 115A AWG 2 BOLT TERMINAL M6 6-35mm² UP TO 41A AWG 10 FEEDTHROUGH TERMINAL 0.5-6mm² AWG 14 FEEDTHROUGH TERMINAL
UP TO 185A AWG 2/0 BOLT TERMINAL M8 35-70mm² UP TO 57A AWG 8 FEEDTHROUGH TERMINAL 1.5-16mm² AWG 12 FEEDTHROUGH TERMINAL
UP TO 265A AWG 4/0 BOLT TERMINAL M10 70-120mm² UP TO 76A AWG 6 FEEDTHROUGH TERMINAL 1.5-16mm²
B B
UP TO 350A 350 MCM BOLT TERMINAL M12 120-185mm² UP TO 115A AWG 2 FEEDTHROUGH TERMINAL 2.5-35mm²
UP TO 500A 550 MCM BOLT TERMINAL M16 185-300mm² UP TO 192A AWG 2/0 FEEDTHROUGH TERMINAL 10-70mm²
UP TO 440A 2x500 MCM CU-BAR M12 2x240mm² DETAIL A UP TO 269A AWG 4/0 FEEDTHROUGH TERMINAL 16-120mm²
UP TO 800A 4x500 MCM CU-BAR M12/16 4x240/2x300mm² DETAIL B
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

UP TO 1200A 8x500 MCM CU-BAR M12/16 8x240/4x300mm² DETAIL C


INFORMATION GENERAL EARTH

IF NO INDIVIDUAL EARTH TERMINAL IS AVAILABLE,


THEN THE PE CONDUCTORS OF THE CABLES SHALL BE
C CONNECTED TO THE GENERAL EARTH BAR C

DIMENSION : DETAIL A DIMENSION : DETAIL B DIMENSION : DETAIL C

CU 2x80x8mm MAX.TWO CABLES


D PER BOLT D
CU 1x80x8mm MAX.TWO CABLES
MAX.TWO CABLES
PER BOLT
CU 1x40x8mm PER BOLT
1
4

1
8

8
1

1
20

4
E E
45

45
20

20
20
20 20 20 20 20 20
40
80 80 75

F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
CONNECTION DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 LEGEND 1150079001/00 04 1/ 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TERMINALS DESCRIPTION TERMINAL PAGE NOTES


CHAPTER : =05
COMMON ALARM -X001:11 18.1E

A EXTERNAL CONNECTION BOARD : -AO25 COMMON ALARM (NC) -X001:12 18.1E


A
COMMON ALARM (NO) -X001:14 18.2E
COMMON ALARM -X002:21 18.2E
COMMON ALARM (NC) -X002:22 18.2E
TERMINAL INFORMATION : COMMON ALARM (NO) -X002:24 18.2E
BATTERY OPERATION -X003:31 18.3E
SIZE TYPE BATTERY OPERATION (NC) -X003:32 18.3E
BATTERY OPERATION (NO) -X003:34 18.3E
2.5mm² FEEDTHROUGH TERMINAL
EXT. CONTACT BYPASS -X004:41 18.4E
EXT. CONTACT BYPASS (NC) -X004:42 18.4E
B B
EXT. CONTACT BYPASS (NO) -X004:44 18.4E
REMOTE ( ON ) -X005:1 18.4E
REMOTE ( OFF ) -X005:2 18.5E
REMOTE ( GND ) -X005:3 18.5E
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

NOT USED -X006:1 18.7E


NOT USED -X006:2 18.7E
NOT USED -X006:3 18.7E
NOT USED -X006:4 18.7E
TEMPERATURE -X007:1 18.7E
C C
TEMPERATURE -X007:2 18.7E
TEMP.COMP. (+) -X007:3 18.8E
TEMP.COMP. (-) -X007:4 18.8E
NOT USED -X008:1 18.5E
NOT USED -X008:2 18.5E
NOT USED -X008:3 18.5E
NOT USED -X008:4 18.6E
NOT USED -X009:1 18.6E
NOT USED -X009:2 18.6E
D D
NOT USED -X009:3 18.6E
NOT USED -X009:4 18.6E
NOT USED -X011:1 18.6E
NOT USED -X011:2 18.6E
NOT USED -X011:3 18.6E
NOT USED -X011:4 18.7E

E E

F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
CONNECTION DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 EXTERNAL CONNECTION BOARD -A025 1150079001/00 04 2 / 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 =O5-A
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

TERMINALS DESCRIPTION TERMINAL PAGE NOTES


CHAPTER : =05
RECTIFIER MAINS FAULT X001:011 19.2E

A RELAY BOARD : -AO77 RECTIFIER MAINS FAULT (NC) X001:012 19.2E


A
RECTIFIER MAINS FAULT (NO) X001:014 19.2E
DC OUT OF TOLERANCE X002:021 19.2E
DC OUT OF TOLERANCE (NC) X002:022 19.3E
TERMINAL INFORMATION : DC OUT OF TOLERANCE (NO) X002:024 19.3E
RECTIFIER FUSE BLOWN X003:031 19.3E
SIZE TYPE RECTIFIER FUSE BLOWN (NC) X003:032 19.4E
RECTIFIER FUSE BLOWN (NO) X003:034 19.4E
2.5mm² FEEDTHROUGH TERMINAL
BATTERY DISCHARGED X004:041 19.4E
BATTERY DISCHARGED (NC) X004:042 19.4E
B B
BATTERY DISCHARGED (NO) X004:044 19.5E
EARTH FAULT DC X005:051 19.5E
EARTH FAULT DC (NC) X005:052 19.5E
EARTH FAULT DC (NO) X005:054 19.6E
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

INVERTER FUSE BLOWN X006:061 19.6E


INVERTER FUSE BLOWN (NC) X006:062 19.6E
INVERTER FUSE BLOWN (NO) X006:064 19.6E
BYPASS MAINS FAULT X007:071 19.7E
BYPASS MAINS FAULT (NC) X007:072 19.7E
C C
BYPASS MAINS FAULT (NO) X007:074 19.7E
OVERTEMPERATURE X008:081 19.8E
OVERTEMPERATURE (NC) X008:082 19.8E
OVERTEMPERATURE (NO) X008:084 19.8E
FAN FAILURE X009:091 20.2E
FAN FAILURE (NC) X009:092 20.2E
FAN FAILURE (NO) X009:094 20.2E
POWER SUPPLY FAULT X010:101 20.2E
POWER SUPPLY FAULT (NC) X010:102 20.3E
D D
POWER SUPPLY FAULT (NO) X010:104 20.3E
OPTION 2 X011:111 20.3E
OPTION 2 (NC) X011:112 20.4E
OPTION 2 (NO) X011:114 20.4E
OPTION 3 X012:121 20.4E
OPTION 3 (NC) X012:122 20.4E
OPTION 3 (NO) X012:124 20.5E
OPTION 4 X013:131 20.5E
OPTION 4 (NC) X013:132 20.5E
E E
OPTION 4 (NO) X013:134 20.6E
OPTION 5 X014:141 20.6E
OPTION 5 (NC) X014:142 20.6E
OPTION 5 (NO) X014:144 20.6E
OPTION 6 X015:151 20.7E
OPTION 6 (NC) X015:152 20.7E
OPTION 6 (NO) X015:154 20.7E
NOT USED X016:161 20.8E
NOT USED X016:162 20.8E
F F
NOT USED X016:164 20.8E
DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN
2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
CONNECTION DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 RELAY BOARD -A077 1150079001/00 04 3 / 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CHAPTER : =05
A TERMINAL INFORMATION : TERMINALS : -X001 CUSTOMER : A

SIZE CURRENT A TYPE TERMINALS DESCRIPTION PAGE TERMINAL NOTES

35mm² (AWG 2) UP TO 115A M6 BOLT TERMINAL MAINS INPUT 1.1F X001:L1


35mm² (AWG 2) UP TO 115A M6 BOLT TERMINAL 3x480V, 60Hz 1.1F X001:L2
35mm² (AWG 2) UP TO 115A M6 BOLT TERMINAL 3PH, 3W 1.2F X001:L3
GENERAL EARTH 1.2F X001:PE

B B
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

C C

D D

E E

F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
CONNECTION DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 MAINS INPUT -X001 1150079001/00 04 4 / 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CHAPTER : =05
A TERMINAL INFORMATION : TERMINALS : -X002 CUSTOMER : A

SIZE CURRENT A TYPE TERMINALS DESCRIPTION PAGE TERMINAL NOTES

2x500 MCM UP TO 440A M12 BOLT TERMINAL BATTERY CONNECTION 5.4F X002:B+ 2x500 MCM ~ 2x240mm²
2x500 MCM UP TO 440A M12 BOLT TERMINAL 125V DC 5.5F X002:B-

B B
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

C C

D D

E E

F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
CONNECTION DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 BATTERY CONNECTION -X002 1150079001/00 04 5 / 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CHAPTER : =07
A TERMINAL INFORMATION : TERMINALS : -X004 CUSTOMER : A

SIZE CURRENT A TYPE TERMINALS DESCRIPTION PAGE TERMINAL NOTES

70mm² (AWG 2/0) UP TO 185A M8 BOLT TERMINAL AC LOAD 3.4F X004:L1


70mm² (AWG 2/0) UP TO 185A M8 BOLT TERMINAL 1x240/120V, 60Hz, 1PH, 3W 3.4F X004:L2
70mm² (AWG 2/0) UP TO 185A M8 BOLT TERMINAL 3.4F X004:N
GENERAL EARTH 3.4F PE

B B
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

C C

D D

E E

F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
CONNECTION DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 AC LOAD -X004 1150079001/00 04 6 / 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

CHAPTER : =07
A TERMINAL INFORMATION : TERMINALS : -X090 CUSTOMER : A

SIZE CURRENT A TYPE TERMINALS DESCRIPTION PAGE TERMINAL NOTES

35mm² (AWG 2) UP TO 115A M6 BOLT TERMINAL BYPASS MAINS INPUT 1.1E X090:L1
35mm² (AWG 2) UP TO 115A M6 BOLT TERMINAL 3x480V, 60Hz, 3PH, 3W 1.1E X090:L2
35mm² (AWG 2) UP TO 115A M6 BOLT TERMINAL 1.2E X090:L3
GENERAL EARTH

B B
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

C C

D D

E E

F F

TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


DATE 13.03.15 AS BUILT
DRAWN NHC
CONNECTION DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME ENG. CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 BYPASS MAINS INPUT -X090 1150079001/00 04 7 / 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A

B 100A B

X1.4
-Q001

22
1

X1.3

21
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

/16.4B
4

6
2
C C

301

302

303

/11.1A
-P004
D D

/11.2A
-P005
-F066

-F067

-F068
L2

L3
L1

-Z001
PE

5A 5A 5A

/11.2A
-P006
E E

K11
K10
K9
1

5
4

6
X001:PE
X001:L2

X001:L3
X001:L1

-X001

2.4A

2.4A

2.4A
10.5A

10.5A

10.6A
F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 MODIFIED 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 MODIFIED 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
WIRING DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 UPS 1150079001/00 05 1 / 21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1.7F

1.8F

1.8F
A A

5
4

6
B B
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

1W
1V
1U
-T001 ..
/10.2C
.

C C

2Z
PE
2X

2Y
D D

E E
9
7

8
3.3A

3.3A

3.3A

F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
WIRING DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 UPS 1150079001/00 05 2 / 21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2.4F

2.4F

2.4F
A A

9
7

8
L2

L3
L1
B B
-A030

X1 /15.6B
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

L+

L-
C C
14

D D
19
1

-L001 .
/10.2B
..
2
PE

E E
15
4.3A

6.1A

F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
WIRING DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 UPS 1150079001/00 05 3 / 21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

3.2F
A A

15
B B

1
-W100

P2
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

U
-P007 /11.5A

P1

I
2
C P2 C

U
-P009 /11.6A
P1

-L005
3

D 1
2 D
PE

E E

31
30
26

27
5.4A

5.5A

6.1A

6.1A
F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
WIRING DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 UPS 1150079001/00 05 4 / 21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

4.3F

4.4F
A A

26

27
B B
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

/16.5B
C C

6
23

23
14
400A
-Q004

24
1

13
5
D D

24

25

E E
X002:B+

X002:B-

-X002

BATTERY CONNECTION
125 VDC

F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 MODIFIED 05.05.15 CHN DATE 13.03.15
WIRING DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 UPS 1150079001/00 05 5 / 21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F
B

E
D
A

1
2

REV.
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

-CB02

-
19

-F032
3.4F

1
1

-A032
/10.3A 31
4.6F
1 2

DESCRIPTION DATE
+ X3_3 132 32 30

05.05.15
4.6F

R101

-
38 X3_1 - X3_2 33
7.7A
C101

DATE
DATE

NAME CHECK
21.07.15 GRM DRAWN
R102

C102

2
2

NHC

CHN
R103

13.03.15
13.03.15
/15.2B C103
X001
R104

-F201
160A
X002
C104

SUBST. FOR :
1 2

-
+

/10.4A
R201

3
3

C201

R202

C202

R203

INT.CNT. :
C203

2
R204
-F202
160A

C204

4
4

1 2

/10.4B R301

C301

R302

C302

R303

UPS
-
+

C303

5
5

R304
-F203
160A

-F034

C304
-A034

/10.3B
1 2 1 2

WIRING DIAGRAM
/10.4B
+ X3_3 134 34
+

R401
X3_1 X3_2
-

39 - 35 C401

TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


7.7A
R402

C402

6
6

R403

C403

/15.2B
X001 R404
-F204
160A

C404
X002

1 2

/10.4C R501

C501
7
7

-
+

DOC. NO.

R502

C502

R503

C503
AS BUILT

R504
-F205
160A

C504
1150079001/00
8
8

1 2
5A

-F050 /10.4D
+

C12 309
05

11.6A
CHAPTER
-

5A

-F051
R006 & CB02 ACC. TO PARTS LIST

C13 310
11.6A
PAGE
6 / 21
F
B

E
D
A

C
èðß
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

7.7F
48
A A

4
300A

2
-F021

1
7

/10.3C
B B
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

49
C C

CU-BAR

5
-A035

1
X001 /15.5B

/11.2A
-P013
2
D D
7
EN
4

1
314

320
317

73

/14.3C
/14.3C
2

6
-F083

-F086

-F089

-K037 /14.3C
1

5A 10A 5A
E E
74
K62
K55

K59

-F028
800A
364

81
75
=07/2.3A

=07/2.3A
10.8A

10.7A

10.6A

14.3A

F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 MODIFIED 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
WIRING DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 UPS 1150079001/00 05 8 / 21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F
B

E
D
A

1
2

REV.
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

1
1

-T005
T005

A071
X021
X001

T005
A201

X001
X001
(L1) 1 K13 1 5 K87 1
(F004) X021:1 X001:1 (23-48VDC)

DESCRIPTION DATE
2 6 K88 2
X001:2 (23-48VDC)

(X007)

05.05.15
(L2) 3 K14 3 7 K89 3
(F005) X021:3 X001:3 (0V)
8 K90 4
X001:4 (0V)

DATE
DATE

NAME CHECK
21.07.15 GRM DRAWN
-T004
-A201 PSU 1

T004

A071
X022
X001

T004
A201
X002

X001
(L1) 1 K73 1 5 K91 1

2
2

NHC

CHN
(F006) X022:1 X002:1 (23-48VDC)
2 6 K92 2
X002:2 (23-48VDC)

13.03.15
13.03.15
(X010)
(L2) 2 3 7 K93 3
(F007) X022:3 X002:3 (0V)
8 K94 4
X002:4 (0V)
(N) 3 K74
X022:5

X004:1-40

SUBST. FOR :
(+5V) (F030)
K
(+) X005:1
(+20V) (F031) X020:1-40
(-) X005:2
(+) X005:3

3
3

(-) X005:4
X006
A201

1
X006:1 (FAULT)
L

2
X006:2 (FAULT)

INT.CNT. :
2
X004:1-40

/13.1E
/12.1E
/11.1E
/10.1E
-A071 INTERFACE

4
4

X001:1 (23-48VDC)
X001:2 (23-48VDC)
X001:3 (0V)
X001:4 (0V)

A071
X032
A202
X003

(BATT+) 1 K36 1
(F027) X032:1 X003:1 (DC+)
-A202 PSU 2

2
X003:2

(X017)
(BATT-) 3 K37 3
(F026) X032:3 X003:3 (DC-)

UPS
5
5

X002:1 (23-48VDC)
K95

X005

X002:2 (23-48VDC)
A071

1
(AUX 1) X005:1 X002:3 (0V)

WIRING DIAGRAM
2
(GND) X005:2 X002:4 (0V)
3 K96
(AUX 2) X005:3
4 K97
(GND) X005:4

TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


5
(AUX 3) X005:5
6 (+) X005:1
(GND) X005:6
(-) X005:2

6
6

(+) X005:3
(-) X005:4
X006
A202

1
X006:1 (FAULT)
2
X006:2 (FAULT)

K100
16.3A
7
7

DOC. NO.
AS BUILT
1150079001/00
8
8

05
CHAPTER
PAGE
9 / 21
F
B

E
D
A

C
F
B

E
D
A

1
2

REV.
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

1
1

DESCRIPTION DATE
-L002
-T002
/7.7C

/7.7B

/9.1E
THERMO SWITCH

X002
A071

05.05.15
1 K51 X010_2 X010_1 K107 X010_2 X010_1
(GND) X002:1

-A071 INTERFACE
2 K52
X002:2

DATE
DATE

NAME CHECK
21.07.15 GRM DRAWN

2
2

NHC

CHN
/3.2D

/2.4B
-T001
-L001
THERMO SWITCH

X002
A071

13.03.15
13.03.15
3 K15 X010_2 X010_1 K105 X010_2 X010_1
X002:3

4 K16
(GND) X002:4

SUBST. FOR :
-F034

/8.4A
-F032

/6.6C
/6.1C

INVERTER

-F021
FUSE BLOWN

X003
A071
1 K53 1 2 B5 1 2 B6 1 2 B7

3
3

X003:1

2 K54
(GND) X003:2

-F205
-F203

-F204
-F202

/6.8C
/6.7C
/6.5C
/6.4C
/6.3C
-F201

1 2 B11 1 2 B10 1 2 B9 1 2 B8 1 2

INT.CNT. :
X003:3

2
X003:4

4
4

X036:1

X036:2

X036:3

UPS
MAINS
VOLTAGE

5
5

A071
X007

(L1) 1 K9
(F001) X007:1 1.6F

(L2) 3 K10
(F002) X007:3 1.6F

WIRING DIAGRAM
(L3) 5 K11
(F003) X007:5 1.6F

TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


BYPASS
VOLTAGE
A071
X010

(L1) 1 K59
(F006) X010:1 8.2F

6
6

(L2) 3
(F007) X010:3

(L3) 5
(F008) X010:5

OUTPUT
VOLTAGE
A071
X011

(L1) 1 K62
(F013) X011:1 8.2F

(L2) 3
(F014) X011:3
7
7

(L3) 7
(F015) X011:7
DOC. NO.

(N) 9 N1
X011:9 7.4F
AS BUILT

INVERTER
VOLTAGE
A071
X012

(L1) 1 K55
(F010) X012:1 8.2F
1150079001/00

(L2) 3
8
8

(F011) X012:3
05

(L3) 5
(F012)
CHAPTER

X012:5
PAGE
10 / 21
F
B

E
D
A

C
F
B

E
D
A

1
2

REV.
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

MODIFIED

1
1

X013
MAINS CURRENT

A071
P004
1 K3 1
(L1) X013:1 X1:1

DESCRIPTION DATE
2 -P004

/9.1E
K4 2
(GND) X013:2 X1:2 /1.7D

05.05.15
P005
3 K5 1
(L2) X013:3 X1:1

-A071 INTERFACE
4 K6 2 -P005
(GND) X013:4 X1:2 /1.8D

DATE
DATE
P006

NAME CHECK
21.07.15 GRM DRAWN
K7 1
(L3) X013:5 X1:1
6 K8 2 -P006
(GND) X013:6 X1:2 /1.8E

2
2

NHC

CHN
13.03.15
13.03.15
X014
OUTPUT CURRENT

A071
P013

1 K75 1
(L1) X014:1 X1:1
2 K76 2 -P013
(GND) X014:2 X1:2 /8.6D

SUBST. FOR :
P014

3 K77 1
(L2) X014:3
4
NOT

K78 2
USED

(GND) X014:4
P015

5 K79 1

3
3

(L3) X014:5
6
NOT

K80 2
USED

(GND) X014:6

X015
A071
INVERTER CURRENT
P010

1 K45 1
(L1) X015:1 X1:1
2 K46 2 -P010

INT.CNT. :
(GND) X015:2 X1:2 /7.7A

2
P011

3 K47 1
(L2) X015:3
4
NOT

K48 2
USED

(GND) X015:4

4
4

P012

5 K49 1
(L3) X015:5
6
NOT

K50 2
USED

(GND) X015:6

X016
DC CURRENT
P007

A071
X001

1 K19 1
(+12V) X016:1 X1:1
2 K20 2
X016:2 X1:2

UPS
(GND)
3 K21 3
(-12V) X016:3 X1:3 -P007
4 K22 4 /4.3C

5
5

(GND) X016:4 X1:4


5 K23 5
(I GR) X016:5 X1:5
X016
A071
P009
X001

WIRING DIAGRAM
K38 1
(+12V) X016:6 X1:1
7 K39 2
(GND) X016:7 X1:2
8 K40 3
(-12V) X016:8 X1:3 -P009
9 K41 4 /4.3D
TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN
(GND) X016:9 X1:4
10 K42 5
(I GR) X016:10 X1:5

6
6

DC
VOLTAGE
A071
X017

(BATT+) 3 C12
(F023) X017:3 6.8F
(X017)

(BATT-) 1 C13
(F022) X017:1 6.8F
X034
A071

FILTER CURRENT
P016

1 K152 1
(L1) X034:1 X1:1
2 K153 2 -P016
(GND) X034:2 X1:2 /7.4C
P017

3 K154 1
(L2) X034:3
7
7

4
NOT

K155 2
USED

(GND) X034:4
DOC. NO.
P018

5 K156 1
(L3) X034:5
6
NOT

K157 2
USED

(GND) X034:6
AS BUILT

(L1) X035:1
(GND) X035:2

(L2) X035:3
1150079001/00
8
8

(GND) X035:4
05
CHAPTER

(L3) X035:5
(GND) X035:6
PAGE
11 / 21
F
B

E
D
A

C
F
B

E
D
A

1
2

REV.
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

1
1

-X025

X019
A071
RECT. SWITCH
1 1 1

/9.1E
K32
(AUX 1) X019:1

DESCRIPTION DATE
05.05.15
2 K33 2 2
(GND) X019:2

-A071 INTERFACE
BOOST INHIBIT
3
(AUX 2) X019:3

DATE
DATE

NAME CHECK
21.07.15 GRM DRAWN
4
(GND) X019:4

2
2

NHC

CHN
13.03.15
13.03.15
5
(AUX 3) X019:5

6
(GND) X019:6

SUBST. FOR :
-X055

X004
A071
FAN MONITOR
1 K98 1 1 K98

3
3

X004:1 21.4F

2 K99 2 2 K99
(GND) X004:2 21.4F

INT.CNT. :
FANS

2
(L3)
(F021) X030:1
(L3)
X030:2

(X011)

4
4

(N) X030:4

(N) X030:5

A071
X029
(L3) FANS
1
(F020) X029:1
(L3) 2
X029:2

UPS
(X011)
4
(N) X029:4

5
5

5
(N) X029:5
-X055

A071
X025

WIRING DIAGRAM
(L1) FANS K65 3 3 K65
1
(F016) X025:1 21.1A
(L1) 2
X025:2
(X011)

TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


4 K66 4 4 K66
(N) X025:4 21.1A
5
(N) X025:5

6
6

A071
X026

(L1) FANS K68 5 5


1
(F017) X026:1
(L1) 2
X026:2
(X011)

4 K69 6 6
(N) X026:4

5
(N) X026:5
A071
X027

7
7

(L2) FANS
1
(F018) X027:1
DOC. NO.

(L2) 2
X027:2
(X011)

4
(N) X027:4

5
(N) X027:5
AS BUILT

(L2) FANS
(F019) X028:1
1150079001/00

(L2)
8
8

X028:2
(X011)

05

(N) X028:4
CHAPTER

(N) X028:5
PAGE
12 / 21
F
B

E
D
A

C
F
B

E
D
A

1
2

REV.
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

1
1

FAN SPEED

/9.1E
CONTROL

X038

DESCRIPTION DATE
A071
1

-X056
X038:1

05.05.15
2 K159 3 3 K159
X038:2 21.1A

-A071 INTERFACE
3 K158 1 1 K158
X038:3 21.1A
4
X038:4

DATE
DATE

NAME CHECK
21.07.15 GRM DRAWN
5 K161 3 3
X038:5

2
2

NHC

CHN
6 K160 1 1
X038:6

13.03.15
13.03.15
A071
X023
-X057
(L1) 1
(F006) X023:1

(L2) 3

SUBST. FOR :
(F007) X023:3

(L3) 5
(F008) X023:5

3
3

(X010)
-1CB4
2
ACC. TO PL

A071
X024
1

INT.CNT. :
(N) X024:1

2
2
(N) X024:2

4
4

(N) X024:3
-A014

-X076

A071
X031
(BATT+) 1 K118 1 1 K118 B+
(F025) X031:1
FE
DDEA

(BATT-) 3 K119 3 3 K119 B-


(F024) X031:3
12
F+

UPS
11 14 /17.2A

(X017)
22
F-

5
5

21 24 /17.2A
X039
A071

1
X039:1

WIRING DIAGRAM
2
(GND) X039:2

TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


A071
X033

(BATT+) 1
(F029) X033:1

(BATT-) 3

6
6

(F028) X033:3
(X017)
X006
A071

1 K101
(ON) X006:1 16.2A
2
(GND) X006:2
3 K102
(OFF) X006:3 16.2A
4
7
7

(GND) X006:4
DOC. NO.

X037:1-10
AB
15.4F
AB1
14.4A
AS BUILT

X008:1-40
M
15.4F
1150079001/00
8
8

X009:1-50
05

N
CHAPTER

15.4F
PAGE
13 / 21
F
B

E
D
A

C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

13.8A
7.5F

8.5F
A A

365

364

AB1
-FO70

-FO69
5A 5A

B B
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

C20

C21

C C

-A016 CONTROL BACKFEED


BOARD

X001:1-10
A1

-K037
A2

X003:2

X004:2

X002:2
X003:3

X004:3
X003:1

X004:1

X002:1
D D

A016 A016 A016


X003 X004 X002
1

1
2

2
E E
C22 C23

1 2 /8.4E
3 4 /8.4E
5 6 /8.4E
F 13 14 F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 MODIFIED 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
WIRING DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 UPS 1150079001/00 05 14 / 21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F
B

E
D
A

1
2

REV.
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

-X079

1
1

X116:1-10

X115
A070
1 1 K140 1 WX
NOT USED X115:1 NOT USED

DESCRIPTION DATE
8 8 K141 2
X115:2

-A070
NOT USED

05.05.15
7 7 K142 3 X001:1-10
NOT USED X115:3 C X001

CONTROLLER
-A032
8 8 /6.1D
K143 4
X115:4

DATE
DATE
NOT USED
X002:1-10

NAME CHECK
21.07.15 GRM DRAWN
D X001
5 5 K144 5 NOT USED
X115:5

2
2

NHC

CHN
6 6 K145 6 X003:1-10
X115:6 E X001

13.03.15
13.03.15
-A034
7 7 /6.6D
K146 7
NOT USED X115:7
X121:1-10
8 8 K147 8
NOT USED X115:8

SUBST. FOR :
K148 9 X122:1-10
NOT USED X115:9

K149 10
NOT USED X115:10
X123:1-10

3
3

K150 11
NOT USED X115:11

K151 12 X124:1-10
NOT USED X115:12

X125:1-10

INT.CNT. :
X009:1-50
N

2
13.8A

X008:1-40 X126:1-10
M
13.8A

4
4

X016:1-10
AB X127:1-10
13.7A

X012:1-40
V
NOT USED X128:1-10

X010:1-14
U
18.8A
X129:1-10

UPS
J104:1-9

5
5

X104:1-20
P
19.1A
X005:1-16
J X001
X105:1-20 -A035

WIRING DIAGRAM
NOT USED /8.4C
X006:1-16
X106:1-40 I X001
Y NOT USED
16.1A
TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN J102:1-34
X014:1-16
A X1

6
6

-A030
J105:1-10 /3.4B
CA
J112:1-20
J114:1-10

NOT USED
X015:1-16
B X001
NOT USED

X118:1-5
-Z071

X119:1-5 J109
7
7

J110
DOC. NO.
X002:1-16

J101:1-10
J111
-A073

J106:1-10
FRONTPANEL

AS BUILT

J107:1-10
-Z070

X007:1-16
X001:1-26

J108:1-10
1150079001/00
8
8

05
-Z073

J116:1-10 X102:1-26
-Z072

CHAPTER
PAGE
15 / 21
F
B

E
D
A

C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

15.6F

13.7A

13.7A

9.7F
A A

3
-XQ004 -XQ090

3
X1.4

12

1
-Q001 -Q004 =07-Q090 =07-Q050
/1.7B /5.4D =07/1.7B =07/2.3C

X1.3

2
1

1
B B
-XQ004 -XQ090

1
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

K81
K44

K84

K82
K43

K83
K1

K2
C C
K101

K102

K100
Y

1
2

2
4

4
-X070 -X070 -X071 -X071

1
2

2
4

4
D D

K81
K44

K84

K82
K43

K83
K1

K2

INPUT CB CHARGER BATT. CB BYP INP. CB OUT. CB MAN. BYP. SW


E FUSE E
X001:1-40

X002:34

X002:12
X002:40

X002:20
X002:33

X002:36

X002:37

X002:38

X002:17

X002:18
X002:35

X002:39

X002:19
X002:11
X002:4
X002:2

X002:3

X002:6
X002:5
X002:1

-A068 ADAPTER PRINT


/17.1E
F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 MODIFIED 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 MODIFIED 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
WIRING DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 UPS 1150079001/00 05 16 / 21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A

X010_1
24
22
14
12
-A014 -A014 =07-T100
/13.4B /13.4B =07/3.4C

21

X010_2
11

B B
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

C C

C70

C71
K121

K122
K120

K123

D D

OPTION 1 OPTION 2 OPTION 3 OPTION 4 OPTION 5 OPTION 6


E T100 OVERTEMPERATURE E
X002:14

X002:24
X002:22

X002:32
X002:10

X002:30
X002:13

X002:16

X002:23

X002:26

X002:27

X002:28
X002:15

X002:25

X002:29
X002:21

X002:31
X002:7

X002:8

X002:9

-A068 ADAPTER PRINT


/16.1E
F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
WIRING DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 UPS 1150079001/00 05 17 / 21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

15.5F
A A

B B
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

C C

U
D D

COMMON COMMON BATTERY EXT. CON. REMOTE TEMP.


E ALARM ALARM OPERATION BYPASS COMP. E

X013:1-14
-X002:21

-X003:31

-X004:41

-X005:1

-X008:1

-X009:1

-X011:1

-X006:1

-X007:1
-X001:12

-X002:22

-X003:32

-X004:42

-X005:2

-X008:2

-X009:2

-X011:2

-X006:2

-X007:2
-X001:14

-X002:24

-X003:34

-X004:44

-X008:4

-X009:4

-X011:4

-X006:4

-X007:4
-X005:3

-X008:3

-X009:3

-X011:3

-X006:3

-X007:3
-X001:11

ON

GND
OFF

(-)
(+)
NO

NO

NO

NO
NC

NC

NC

NC

* * * *
-A025 EXTERNAL CONNECTION BOARD ( * ALARM POSITION )
F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
WIRING DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 UPS 1150079001/00 05 18 / 21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

15.5F
A A

B B
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

C C
P

D D

RECTIFIER DC OUT OF RECTIFIER BATTERY EARTH INVERTER BYPASS OVERTEMP.


E MAINS FAULT TOLERANCE FUSE BLOWN DISCHARGED FAULT DC FUSE BLOWN MAINS FAULT E
X017:1-20

X001:011

X002:021

X003:031

X004:041

X005:051

X006:061

X007:071

X008:081
X007:074

X008:084
X001:012

X003:032

X004:042

X005:052

X006:062

X007:072

X008:082
X001:014

X002:022

X002:024

X003:034

X004:044

X005:054

X006:064
( * ALARM POSITION )
NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO
NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC
-A077 * * * * * * * *
/20.1E K001 K002 K003 K004 K005 K006 K007 K008
F RELAY BOARD F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
WIRING DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 UPS 1150079001/00 05 19 / 21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

A A

B B
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

C C

D D

FAN POWER OPTION 2 OPTION 3 OPTION 4 OPTION 5 OPTION 6


E FAILURE SUPPLY E
FAULT
X009:091

X010:101

X011:111

X012:121

X013:131

X014:141

X015:151

X016:161
X010:104

X013:134
X009:094

X015:154

X016:164
X011:114

X012:124

X014:144
X010:102

X015:152
X009:092

X011:112

X012:122

X014:142
X013:132

X016:162
( * ALARM POSITION )
NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO
NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC

NC
-A077 * * * * * * * *
/19.1E K009 K010 K011 K012 K013 K014 K015 K016
F RELAY BOARD F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
WIRING DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 UPS 1150079001/00 05 20 / 21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
F
B

E
D
A

1
2

REV.
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

K66
12.6A

1
1

K65
12.5A
K159

DESCRIPTION DATE
13.1A
PE
240V K158

05.05.15
PE 13.2A
220V K63
208V 230V
127V 230V
120V

DATE
DATE

NAME CHECK
21.07.15 GRM DRAWN
115V K64
110V 0V

2
2

NHC

CHN
0V 0V

13.03.15
13.03.15
X003:1

-T051

A055
X001
1 K85
X001:1

SUBST. FOR :
3 K86
X001:3

PE
PE

3
3

-E001
E1X1
GNYE

E1X1 8 F3

-X003
-X002

X004
A055
L
L

1 F5 3 1 BK BK 1 9 F4
X004:1 N
N

2 F6 5 2 WH BN 2 1 F46
M

X004:2 +
+

3 F7 4 3 RD BU 3 2 F47
-

X004:3 -

X002
A055

INT.CNT. :
K98 1
12.3A X002:1
PE

2
K99 2
12.3A X002:2
-E021

E21X1

X007
A055
GNYE
F49
F48
F13
F14

4
4

3 F12 4 RED E21X1


X007:3
2 F11 2 WHITE 1(L) 7 F8
M

X007:2
1 F10 3 BLACK 2(N) 8 F9
X007:1

-A055
PE
PE

E2X1
-E002
GNYE

E2X1

UPS
8 F15
FAN MONITOR
-X003
-X002

X005
A055

L
L

1 F17 3 1 BK BK 1 9 F16
X005:1 N

5
5

2 F18 5 2 WH BN 2 1 F50
M

X005:2 +
+

3 F19 4 3 RD BU 3 2 F51
X005:3 -
-

WIRING DIAGRAM
PE
-E022

E22X1
X008
A055
GNYE
F25

F53
F26
F52

TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


3 F24 4 RED E22X1
X008:3
2 F23 2 WHITE 1(L) 7 F20
M

X008:2
1 F22 3 BLACK 2(N) 8 F21
X008:1

6
6

X010 PE
PE

E3X1
-E003
GNYE

E3X1 8 F27
-X003
-X002

X006
A055

L
L

1 F29 3 1 BK BK 1 9 F28
X006:1 N
N

2 F30 5 2 WH BN 2 1 F54
M

X006:2 +
+

3 F31 4 3 RD BU 3 2 F55
-

X006:3 -
7
7

X011
DOC. NO.
-FCT1

E23X1
X009
A055

3 F36 4 E23X1
X009:3
2 F35 2 7 F32
X009:2
AS BUILT

1 F34 3 8 F33
X009:1
1150079001/00
8
8

05
CHAPTER
PAGE
21 / 21
F
B

E
D
A

C
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

=05/7.7F
A A

62

63

64

65

=05/16.6B
50A
B -Q090 B

14

12
1

5
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

11
6

8
2

54
C C

66

67

68

69
1W
1U

1V

1X
-T090
L1

L2

L3

D D
-Z003
PE

2u

2v

PE
109
E E
108

N
-W060

70
X090:L1

X090:L2

X090:L3

322

323

324

92
EARTH BAR
-X090
GENERAL EARTH

2.2A

3.4A
4.2A

4.3A

4.3A

MAINS BYPASS INPUT


3x480V 60Hz
3PH. 3W
F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 MODIFIED 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 MODIFIED 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
WIRING DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 BYPASS / INCOMING 1150079001/00 07 1/ 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

=05/8.4F

=05/8.6F
1.7F
A A

81
70

75
B MANUAL BYPASS SWITCH B
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

.3C
-Q050 BYPASS 540-9154

INPUT AUX.
2

7
C C
BYPASS

AUTO
TEST

1 8

1 2

8
1
3
5
7
150A

DIAGRAM

7
2

6
8
4
-Q050
BYPASS
TEST
AUTO

8
2

6
1

=05/16.8B

.6C
70

D D

E E
84
3.4A

F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
WIRING DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 BYPASS / INCOMING 1150079001/00 07 2 / 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

2.3F

1.7F
A A

109
84
B B
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

1U
1V
C C
-T100 ..
PRI/SEC: 240/120V-240V =05/17.4A
.

30KVA

2X

PE
2V

2U
D D

SOLID
GROUNDED
NEUTRAL
201

202

203

E E
X004:L1

X004:L2
X004:N

-X004
GENERAL EARTH
AC LOAD 240/120V
F 1PH. 3W F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 MODIFIED 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
WIRING DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 BYPASS / INCOMING 1150079001/00 07 3 / 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1.4F

1.4F

1.5F
A A

322

323

324
B B
RESPECT PROTECTIVE NOTE ISO 16016

-F073

-F074

-F075

C C
A20

A21

A22

D D
7

5
1

-S091
SELECTOR SWITCH
2

4
A25

A26

E E
+

-P092
V
-

F F

DATE 13.03.15 TYPE : PEW 1030-125/240-EN


2 MODIFIED 21.07.15 GRM DRAWN NHC AS BUILT
1 05.05.15 DATE 13.03.15
WIRING DIAGRAM DOC. NO. CHAPTER PAGE
REV. DESCRIPTION DATE NAME CHECK CHN SUBST. FOR : INT.CNT. : 2 BYPASS / INCOMING 1150079001/00 07 4 / 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Bill of Material 4A-1150079001/50

CLIENT: Volta DATE: 6/22/2015


PROJECT TITLE: EXTERRAN UPS System VENDORS NAME: Schneider Electric
SYSTEM TYPE: Gutor PEW 1030-125/240-EN BOM REVISION: 8

PO No: 48652 SYSTEM No: 1150079001

Item Number Quantity Description Ref. Designator


450-0307B 1 RELAY DC EARTH FAULT TYPE DDEA 20-500VDC A014
0W3217 1 CABLE HARNESS XXW A014 A014_CT
0P0127 1 BACKFEED PROTECT D P310BC-3160 A016
0P9907 1 EXTERNAL CONNECTION BOARD PEW/ PDW A025
0C0950 1 RECT MODULE PXW 145ADC<IDC=<365ADC A030
0C0920 1 PM 1/2 24-300VDC 920ARMS/2400APEAK A032
0C0920 1 PM 1/2 24-300VDC 920ARMS/2400APEAK A034
0C0074 1 SSW PEW 1~ EN/EA 100AAC<IAC=<200AAC A035
0P2438 1 FAN MONITOR 8 CH FOR LOW FAN SPEED 120-240VAC A05x
0P9914 1 ADAPTER-BOARD 40 POL90*115MM A068
0P3895AA 1 PCB ASSY XXW CONTROLLER A070
0P2406A 1 XXW I/F BOARD 110 / 125 VDC A071
430-4081B 3 XFMR SAF ISOL -15% 250-289VAC+10% IEC/UL A071
110-0000 1 R ORO 5A RES. A071_IJ22
430-0048B 1 XFMR SAF ISOL -15% 216-251VAC+10% IEC/UL A071_T006
430-0048B 1 XFMR SAF ISOL -15% 216-251VAC+10% IEC/UL A071_T009
0M-94035B 1 FRONTPANEL COMPLETE A073
0P9912A 1 RELAY BOARD 24VDC 16 RELAY PEW/PDW A077
0P0280 1 COMPLETE PCB PSU AC SUPPLY OUT 0500162 A201
0P0285 1 PSU 110/125VDC OUT:+20VDC/+-12VDC/+5VDC A202
0M-94103 1 CB02 M.KIT5 (ALU) 8-21 CAPACITORS CB02
0M-816863 2 CB02 M.KIT CU-TINNED CONNECT.TO LARGE PM CB02
202-0109 20 CE 10000UF 200VDC STUD CB02
803-0090 20 NUT NYLON M12 PYB7042 CB02
LM149 XXW- CB02 - DISCHARGE RESISTORS - ASSEMBLY CB02_R006_Layout
120-0273 20 R 27K 10W SPEC. RES FOR DC-CAP CB02_RESISTORS
234-9225 3 CAP 250VAC 150 UF 63.5 X 132 M12 CB03
0W11712 8 CB03 BRIDGE WIRE CB03_CT1
0W11711 3 CB03 400MM_4MM2 WIRE CB03_CT2
0W11714 3 CB03 160MM_4MM2 WIRE CB03_CT4
LM277_2 CB03 Layout No 2_1_4_3 CB03_LAYOUT
0M-97220 1 CB03 AC MECH.KIT 375 1PH CB03_MECH_1
0P6245 1 CT AC 58A<INV=<72A CB03_P016
234-9228 4 CAP 480VAC 60 UF 63.5 X 132 M12 CB03_Y2
0M-8190 3 SUB ASSEMBLY FAN 230VAC DUAL SPEED XXW E00x
0M-94028 2 SUB ASSEMBLY FAN 230 VAC FOR ROOF XXW E02x
515-9025 1 SEMIC.FUSE 300A/250VFWX UL/CSA F021
0M-94050 1 INDICATOR FOR FWX FUSE 225A-800A F021_Ind
0M-94145 1 FUSE.KIT06 1PH SSW2 EN F021_Kit
515-9031 1 SEMIC.FUSE 800A/250VFWX UL/CSA F028
511-0071 2 SQUARE-BODY FUSE 630A SIZE 32 NO: M300069 F032-F034
0M-816862 2 CB02 M.KIT CU-TINNED CONNECT PM UL F032-F034_HOLDER
511-0067 2 TRIP INDICATION SQUARE-BODY FUSE NO: X310014 F032-F034_IND
516-0105A 1 FUSE FAST 5A 500V 6.3X32MM ROHS UL F050_FUSE
890-0094 1 FUSE DISCONNECTOR 6.3X32MM SCREW CLAMP F050_HOLDER

7/22/2015 1150079001/50 Page 1 / 4


Bill of Material 4A-1150079001/50

CLIENT: Volta DATE: 6/22/2015


PROJECT TITLE: EXTERRAN UPS System VENDORS NAME: Schneider Electric
SYSTEM TYPE: Gutor PEW 1030-125/240-EN BOM REVISION: 8

PO No: 48652 SYSTEM No: 1150079001

Item Number Quantity Description Ref. Designator


516-0105A 1 FUSE FAST 5A 500V 6.3X32MM ROHS UL F051_FUSE
890-0094 1 FUSE DISCONNECTOR 6.3X32MM SCREW CLAMP F051_HOLDER
516-0129 1 FUSE 10X38 5A CC 600VAC UL AC USE ONLY F066_FUSE
890-9044 1 FUSEHOLDER 1 POLE 10X38MM 690VAC UL F066_HOLDER
516-0129 1 FUSE 10X38 5A CC 600VAC UL AC USE ONLY F067_FUSE
890-9044 1 FUSEHOLDER 1 POLE 10X38MM 690VAC UL F067_HOLDER
516-0129 1 FUSE 10X38 5A CC 600VAC UL AC USE ONLY F068_FUSE
890-9044 1 FUSEHOLDER 1 POLE 10X38MM 690VAC UL F068_HOLDER
516-0129 1 FUSE 10X38 5A CC 600VAC UL AC USE ONLY F069_FUSE
890-9044 1 FUSEHOLDER 1 POLE 10X38MM 690VAC UL F069_HOLDER
516-0129 1 FUSE 10X38 5A CC 600VAC UL AC USE ONLY F070_FUSE
890-9044 1 FUSEHOLDER 1 POLE 10X38MM 690VAC UL F070_HOLDER
516-0129 1 FUSE 10X38 5A CC 600VAC UL AC USE ONLY F073_FUSE
890-9044 1 FUSEHOLDER 1 POLE 10X38MM 690VAC UL F073_HOLDER
516-0129 1 FUSE 10X38 5A CC 600VAC UL AC USE ONLY F074_FUSE
890-9044 1 FUSEHOLDER 1 POLE 10X38MM 690VAC UL F074_HOLDER
516-0129 1 FUSE 10X38 5A CC 600VAC UL AC USE ONLY F075_FUSE
890-9044 1 FUSEHOLDER 1 POLE 10X38MM 690VAC UL F075_HOLDER
516-0129 1 FUSE 10X38 5A CC 600VAC UL AC USE ONLY F083_FUSE
890-9044 1 FUSEHOLDER 1 POLE 10X38MM 690VAC UL F083_HOLDER
516-0167 1 FUSE 10X38 10A CC 600VAC UL F086_FUSE
890-9044 1 FUSEHOLDER 1 POLE 10X38MM 690VAC UL F086_HOLDER
516-0129 1 FUSE 10X38 5A CC 600VAC UL AC USE ONLY F089_FUSE
890-9044 1 FUSEHOLDER 1 POLE 10X38MM 690VAC UL F089_HOLDER
516-0167 1 FUSE 10X38 10A CC 600VAC UL F104_FUSE
890-9044 1 FUSEHOLDER 1 POLE 10X38MM 690VAC UL F104_HOLDER
515-9046 1 SEMIC.FUSE 160A/690V UL F201
515-9015 1 INDICATOR F. SEMIC FUSE TYPE E_T/F_E F201_IND
540-9197 1 FUSE MICROSWITCH - INDICATOR F201_MS
515-9046 1 SEMIC.FUSE 160A/690V UL F202
515-9015 1 INDICATOR F. SEMIC FUSE TYPE E_T/F_E F202_IND
540-9197 1 FUSE MICROSWITCH - INDICATOR F202_MS
515-9046 1 SEMIC.FUSE 160A/690V UL F203
515-9015 1 INDICATOR F. SEMIC FUSE TYPE E_T/F_E F203_IND
540-9197 1 FUSE MICROSWITCH - INDICATOR F203_MS
515-9046 1 SEMIC.FUSE 160A/690V UL F204
515-9015 1 INDICATOR F. SEMIC FUSE TYPE E_T/F_E F204_IND
540-9197 1 FUSE MICROSWITCH - INDICATOR F204_MS
515-9046 1 SEMIC.FUSE 160A/690V UL F205
515-9015 1 INDICATOR F. SEMIC FUSE TYPE E_T/F_E F205_IND
540-9197 1 FUSE MICROSWITCH - INDICATOR F205_MS
511-0065 1 SQUARE-BODY FUSE 80A SIZE 30 NO: S300051 F301
870-93018 1 MOUNT PLATE PXW MOD.DISTANCE 35MM FBOX_Pos4
870-10607 1 MOUNT PLATE PXW MODULE DISTANCE 40MM FBOX_Pos5
870-10575A 2 COVER FANBOX 200 X 148 FBOX_Pos6

7/22/2015 1150079001/50 Page 2 / 4


Bill of Material 4A-1150079001/50

CLIENT: Volta DATE: 6/22/2015


PROJECT TITLE: EXTERRAN UPS System VENDORS NAME: Schneider Electric
SYSTEM TYPE: Gutor PEW 1030-125/240-EN BOM REVISION: 8

PO No: 48652 SYSTEM No: 1150079001

Item Number Quantity Description Ref. Designator


451-0197 1 CONT 3POL250A 400V AC-1 COIL85-275VAC/DC K037
451-0096 2 ACC CONT CONNECTION BARS FOR AF145-AF185 K037_BARS_1
880-1919 2 BUSBAR FOR PARALLEL CONN. FOR AF145-AF185 K037_BARS_2
0P6237 1 CT AC 72A<INV=<90A 70A<REC=<135A P004
0P6237 1 CT AC 72A<INV=<90A 70A<REC=<135A P005
0P6237 1 CT AC 72A<INV=<90A 70A<REC=<135A P006
0P6286A 1 CT DC 324A<IDC=<375A 485A<IDISCH=<562A P007
0M-94088 1 DC CURRENT MEASURE XXW MECH. IDC >186A P007_P009
0P6283A 1 CT DC 254A<IDC=<281A 381A<IDISCH=<421A P009
0P6240 1 CT AC 480A<INV=<600A470A<REC=<900A P010
0P6246 1 CT AC 110A<INV=<140A P013
950-0214 1 V-METER 0-600VAC 60HZ 90DEG 96X96 UL P092
234-0335 1 CAP MTL PPR 400V 5% 3UF RD PF_1CB4
UNC1-530-3313 1 MCCB 3P 480VAC 100A NO 3VL11 10-2KM30-0AA0 Q001
530-0992 1 CONTACT AUX SIEMENS VL (1NO/1NC) DG-LG UL Q001_AUX
530-2414 2 CB_SCREW CONN TERMINAL 3PCS VL150X UL Q001_TRM
530-9639 1 MCCB 3P 400A 500VDC_20KA SQUARE D UL/CSA Q004
530-9660 1 SWITCH AUX 3A_3B LH FRAME SQUARE D UL Q004_AUX
530-1479 2 CB H FRAME TERMINAL NUT INSERT M6 Q004_TRM
540-9154 1 BYPASS MAN. SW. 1P. 3POS 150A 2AX NO.NC Q050
870-92878 1 MOUNT. PLATE FOR SWITCH Q050_MECH
UNC1-530-4053 1 MCCB 4P 480VAC 50A NO: 1SDA053934R1 Q090
530-0889 1 AUX CONTACT FOR ABB TMAX T1-T3 2X OPEN/CLOSE Q090_AUX
540-9192 1 SWITCH V-METER CA10 A004-624 E S091
0M-5464 1 SUB ASSY PSU TRAFO 230V-20% / 240V+20% T004
0M-94085 1 PSU TRAFO SUB.ASS. 460V-20% / 500V+20% T005
430-9521 1 AUTOTR. 110-240/230V 500VA T05x
0P9895 1 LOADED PCB RFI F. MAINS BYP. OR OUTP 480V 3PH Z001
410-0900 1 FERRITE CLIP-ON RND ROUND CABLE Z070
410-0900 1 FERRITE CLIP-ON RND ROUND CABLE Z071
410-0900 1 FERRITE CLIP-ON RND ROUND CABLE Z072
410-0900 1 FERRITE CLIP-ON RND ROUND CABLE Z073

Master Part List, Option Magnetics


420-L01-564407 1 CHOKE DC 144 400 363 ETL L001
430-L21-181207 1 CHOKE AC 1030 2KHZ 125VDC ETL L002
UNC1-422-2833 1 CHOKE BATT 363A ACC 1150079002_33 L005
UNC1-432-11759 1 TRAFO 6P 480 121 365 ETL (UL) T001
432-T21-26712407 1 TRAFO OUT 1030 2x71 220-240 ETL T002
432-T92-18482407 1 TRAFO BYP 1030 480 240 ETL T090
UNC1-432-11761 1 TRAFO DIST 1PH 30KVA 240 240 ETL T100

Mechanical parts, UPS Cubicle


UNC1-870-17277 1 CUBICLE ACC 1150079001_14 CUBICLE
870-92617 2 BASECOVER FRONT/REAR 775MM FR1_IPK_B1_P1

7/22/2015 1150079001/50 Page 3 / 4


Bill of Material 4A-1150079001/50

CLIENT: Volta DATE: 6/22/2015


PROJECT TITLE: EXTERRAN UPS System VENDORS NAME: Schneider Electric
SYSTEM TYPE: Gutor PEW 1030-125/240-EN BOM REVISION: 8

PO No: 48652 SYSTEM No: 1150079001

Item Number Quantity Description Ref. Designator


822-0038 8 FASTENER SOCKET GRID FR1_IPK_B1_P2
870-92644 2 BASE COVER 400MM FR1_IPK_B1_P3
870-92928 1 SOIL GRID IP20 630X690 FR1_IPK_B2_P1
870-92925 1 SOIL GRID IP20 300X690 FR1_IPK_B2_P2
870-92612 1 TOP COVER 1150X800MMIP20 FR1_IPK_T1_P1
0M-94033 1 S/A FRAME 1150X750X1800 FR1_UPS
0M-5469 1 KIT UPS M FOR FRAME 1150 1800 FR1_UPS_MKIT
870-92617 2 BASECOVER FRONT/REAR 775MM FR3_IPK_B1_P1
822-0038 8 FASTENER SOCKET GRID FR3_IPK_B1_P2
870-92644 2 BASE COVER 400MM FR3_IPK_B1_P3
870-92928 1 SOIL GRID IP20 630X690 FR3_IPK_B2_P1
870-92925 1 SOIL GRID IP20 300X690 FR3_IPK_B2_P2
870-92708 1 TOP COVER 775X800MMW. CABLE ENTRY FR3_IPK_T2_P1
870-92710 1 IP20 FOR TOP COVER 775X800MM (320X690) FR3_IPK_T2_P2
870-92709 1 GLAND PLATE FOR TOP COVER 775X800MM FR3_IPK_T2_P3
870-92702 1 TOP COVER 375X800MMW. CABLE ENTRY FR3_IPK_T2_P4
870-92705 1 IP20 FOR TOP COVER 375/400X800MM FR3_IPK_T2_P5
870-92704 1 GLANDPLATE FOR TOP COVER 375/400X800MM FR3_IPK_T2_P6

Software
0F-3895AA 1 FIRMWARE BUNDLE XXW REV AA Software_Bundle

Battery
Batterybank 1 60 x GNB 90G15

7/22/2015 1150079001/50 Page 4 / 4


.
.
.

ÍÛÎÊ×ÝÛ ‰ ÌÎß×Ò×ÒÙ ‰ ÝÑÒÌßÝÌ ßÜÜÎÛÍÍÛÍ Page 7 / 7 7RA9092GB: Rev.04

NORTH AND SOUTH AMERICA:


GUTOR Electronic LLC
12121 Wickchester Lane, Suite 400
Houston, Texas 77079, USA
P 281 588 2145
F 859 962 4593
gutor-service-us@schneider-electric.com

MIDDLE EAST:

CHAPTER 11
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Villa No.2, Defence Road,St.11,
Behind Gava Hotel,
P.O.Box 29580, Abu Dhabi, U.A.E.
P +971 (0)2 443 89 93
F +971 (0)2 443 89 92
gutor-service-ae@schneider-electric.com

BATTERY DOCUMENT
SAUDI ARABIA:
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Middle East Commercial Complex
AL-Khobar 31952
P.O.Box. 79575, Saudi Arabia
P +966 (0)3 864 9667
F +966 (0)3 864 9062
gutor-service-sa@schneider-electric.com

RUSSIA
The GUTOR by Schneider Hotline number is: 8-800-200-6446

Please dial 0 for technical consultation, then the Customer Care Center specialist will connect you
to GUTOR by Schneider engineer.

The hotline is open Monday to Friday 8am – 6 pm (Outside business hours please call our GUTOR
Hotline in Switzerland: +41 56 437 6263)

© GUTOR Electronic LLC CH-5430 Wettingen Switzerland


GNB Industrial Power –
The Industry Leader.

SECTION 92.61 2013-09

Installation and Operating

Instructions

®
For

GNB Industrial Power, a division of Exide Technologies, is a


global leader in network power applications including
Based on over 100 years of technological innovation the Network
Power group leads the industry with the most recognized global
ABSOLYTE® GP Batteries
communication/data networks, UPS systems for computers brands such as ABSOLYTE®, GNB® FLOODED CLASSIC®,
and control systems, electrical power generation and MARATHON®, RELAY GEL®, SONNENSCHEIN®, and
distribution systems, as well as a wide range of other SPRINTER®. They have come to symbolize quality, reliability,
industrial standby power applications. With a strong performance and excellence in all the markets served.
manufacturing base in both North America and Europe and a
truly global reach (operations in more than 80 countries) in GNB Industrial Power takes pride in its commitment to a better
sales and service, GNB Industrial Power is best positioned to environment. Its Total Battery Management program, an
satisfy your back up power needs locally as well as all over the integrated approach to manufacturing, distributing and recycling
world. of lead acid batteries, has been developed to ensure a safe and
responsible life cycle for all of its products.

GNB Industrial Power


USA – Tel: 888.898.4462
Canada – Tel: 800.268.2698

www.gnb.com
UL Recognized Component
SECTION 92.61
93.10 2013-09
2010-12 A Division of Exide Technologies A Division of Exide Technologies
INDEX
Page
SECTION 1
1.0 General Information.............................................................................................................. 1

SECTION 2
2.0 Safety Precautions................................................................................................................ 1
2.1 Sulfuric Acid Electrolyte Burns.............................................................................................. 1
2.2 Explosive Gases................................................................................................................... 1
2.3 Electrical Shock and Burns................................................................................................... 1
2.3.1 Static Discharge Precautions for Batteries........................................................................... 1
2.4 Safety Alert........................................................................................................................... 2
2.5 Important Message............................................................................................................... 2

SECTION 3
3.0 Receipt of Shipment.............................................................................................................. 2
3.1 Concealed Damage.............................................................................................................. 2

SECTION 4
4.0 Storage Prior to Installation................................................................................................... 2
4.1 Storage Location................................................................................................................... 2
4.2 Storage Interval..................................................................................................................... 2

SECTION 5
5.0 Installation Considerations.................................................................................................... 2
5.1 Space Considerations........................................................................................................... 2
5.2 Battery Location and Ambient Temperature Requirements.................................................. 2
5.3 Temperature Variations........................................................................................................ 4
5.4 Ventilation............................................................................................................................. 4
5.5 Floor Loading........................................................................................................................ 4
5.6 Floor Anchoring..................................................................................................................... 4
5.7 Connecting Cables: Battery System to Operating Equipment.............................................. 4
5.7.1 Paralleling............................................................................................................................. 4
5.8 Stacking Limitations.............................................................................................................. 4
5.9 Terminal Plates..................................................................................................................... 4
5.10 Grounding............................................................................................................................. 4

SECTION 6
6.0 Unpacking and Handling....................................................................................................... 5
6.1 General................................................................................................................................. 5
6.2 Accessories........................................................................................................................... 5
6.3 Recommended Installation Equipment and Supplies........................................................... 5
6.4 Unpacking............................................................................................................................. 5
6.5 Handling................................................................................................................................ 5

SECTION 7
7.0 System Arrangements.......................................................................................................... 6
7.1 Module Arrangements........................................................................................................... 6
7.2 Dummy Cells within a Module............................................................................................... 7

SECTION 8
8.0 System Assembly................................................................................................................. 7
8.1 Horizontal - Single Stack....................................................................................................... 7
8.1.1 Bottom I-Beam Supports....................................................................................................... 7
8.1.2 Handling................................................................................................................................ 8
8.1.3 Horizontal Stacking............................................................................................................... 8
8.2 Horizontal-Multiple Stacking................................................................................................. 10
8.2.1 Stack Tie Plates.................................................................................................................... 11
SECTION 9
9.0 Connections.......................................................................................................................... 12
9.1 Post Preparation................................................................................................................... 12
9.2 Connections - System Terminals.......................................................................................... 12
9.3 Connections - INTER-Module............................................................................................... 12
9.4 Connections - INTER-Stack.................................................................................................. 12
9.5 Connections - Torquing......................................................................................................... 12
9.6 Connections - Check............................................................................................................. 12
9.7 Connection Resistance......................................................................................................... 12
9.8 Cell Numerals....................................................................................................................... 12
9.9 Warning Label....................................................................................................................... 12
9.10 Battery Nameplate................................................................................................................ 12

SECTION 10
10.0 Protective Module Covers..................................................................................................... 17
10.1 Module Cover Installation..................................................................................................... 17

SECTION 11
11.0 Initial Charge......................................................................................................................... 17
11.1 Constant Voltage Method..................................................................................................... 17

SECTION 12
12.0 Operation.............................................................................................................................. 18
12.0.1 Cycle Method of Operation................................................................................................... 18
12.1 Floating Charge Method....................................................................................................... 18
12.2 Float Charge - Float Voltages............................................................................................... 18
12.3 Voltmeter Calibration............................................................................................................ 18
12.4 Recharge.............................................................................................................................. 18
12.5 Determining State-of-Charge................................................................................................ 18
12.6 Effects of Float Voltage......................................................................................................... 19
12.7 Float Current and Thermal Management.............................................................................. 19
12.8 AC Ripple.............................................................................................................................. 19
12.9 Ohmic Measurements........................................................................................................... 19

SECTION 13
13.0 Equalizing Charge................................................................................................................. 19
13.1 Equalizing Frequency........................................................................................................... 19
13.2 Equalizing Charge Method.................................................................................................... 20

SECTION 14
14.0 Pilot Cell................................................................................................................................ 20

SECTION 15
15.0 Records................................................................................................................................. 20

SECTION 16
16.0 Tap Connections................................................................................................................... 21

SECTION 17
17.0 Temporary Non-Use............................................................................................................. 21

SECTION 18
18.0 Unit Cleaning........................................................................................................................ 21

SECTION 19
19.0 Connections.......................................................................................................................... 21

SECTION 20
20.0 Capacity Testing................................................................................................................... 21
LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS

Page

3 Fig. 1A-B Typical Systems - Top View
5 Fig. 2 Packed Modules
5 Fig. 3 Unpacking Modules
6 Fig. 4 Handling - Lifting Strap Placement
6 Fig. 6A-B-C Typical Horizontal Stack Arrangements - Front Views
7 Fig. 7 Typical Horizontal Stack Arrangements - Back to Back and End to End
7 Fig. 8 Hardware Installation for 2.67” Wide I-Beam Support
7 Fig. 9 Hardware Installation for 4.5” Wide I-Beam Support
7 Fig. 10 Completed I-Beam Support to Module Installation
8 Fig. 11 Handling Module - Base Support Assembly
8 Fig. 12A Tip-Over Procedure - Shackle-Strap Usage
9 Fig. 12B Tip-Over Procedure
9 Fig. 13 Module with Base Assembly After Tip-Over
9 Fig. 14 Horizontal Stacking - Shackle-Strap Usage
10 Fig. 15 Handling and Stacking Horizontal Modules
10 Fig. 16 Hardware Installation Sequence
10 Fig. 17A Installing Hardware
10 Fig. 17B Completed Horizontal Stack
10 Fig. 18 Positioning Horizontal Base Modlule
11 Fig. 19A Horizontal Stacks - Back to Back Positioning
11 Fig. 19B Completed Horizontal Stacks - Side by Side
11 Fig. 20A-B Tie Plate Assemblies - Horizontal Stacks
13 Fig. 21 Various Inter Stack and Intra Stack Connections - Horizontal Arrangements
14 Fig. 22 Terminal Plate Kit - 6 Cell Modules
15 Fig. 23 Terminal Plate Kit - 3 Cell Modules
16 Fig. 24 Installation Guide for Absolyte GP Transparent Cover
22 Fig. 25 Absolyte Battery Maintenance Report

APPENDICES

24 A Temperature Corrected Float Voltages



25 B Maximum Storage Interval Between Freshening Charges Versus
Average Storage Temperature
26 C Bonding and Grounding of Battery Rack
27 D Absolyte GP Maximum Module Stack Heights
SECTION 1 significantly reduce hydrogen formation. Tests have shown
that 99% or more of generated gases are recombined within
the cell under normal operating conditions. Under abnormal
1.0 General Information
operating conditions (e.g. charger malfunction), the safety
valve may open and release these gases through the vent.
The Absolyte GP battery is of the valve-regulated lead-acid The gases can explode and cause blindness and other
(VRLA) design and so can operate with lower maintenance (e.g. serious injury.
no maintenance water additions) in comparison to conventional
flooded lead-acid batteries. The Absolyte GP VRLA design Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from the
is also inherently safer than conventional flooded lead-acid battery area and the explosive gases.
batteries. Under normal operating conditions and use, the
Absolyte GP battery minimizes hydrogen gas release, and All installation tools should be adequately insulated to
virtually eliminates acid misting and acid leakage. However, there minimize the possibility of shorting across connections.
is the possibility that under abnormal operating conditions (e.g.
over-charge), or as a result of damage, misuse and/or abuse,
potentially hazardous conditions (hydrogen gassing, acid misting DANGER
and leakage) may occur. Thus, GNB recommends that Section ELECTRICAL SHOCK
2.0 of these instructions entitled “SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” be
reviewed thoroughly prior to commissioning, and strictly followed AND BURNS
when working with Absolyte GP batteries.

Never lay tools or other metallic objects on modules as


! CAUTION!
shorting, explosions and personal injury may result.

2.3 Electrical Shock and Burns


Before proceeding with the unpack-
ing, handling, installation and opera- Multi-cell systems attain high voltages, therefore, extreme
tion of this VRLA storage battery, caution must be exercised during installation of a battery sys-
the following general information tem to prevent serious electrical burns or shock.
should be reviewed together with the
Interrupt the AC and DC circuits before working on batteries
recommended safety precautions.
or charging equipment.

Assure that personnel understand the risk of working with


batteries, and are prepared and equipped to take the nec-
essary safety precautions. These installation and operating
SECTION 2 instructions should be understood and followed. Assure that
you have the necessary equipment for the work, including
2.0 Safety Precautions insulated tools, rubber gloves, rubber aprons, safety goggles
and face protection.
2.1 Sulfuric Acid Electrolyte Burns

DANGER SULFURIC
ACID ELECTROLYTE
BURNS
! CAUTION!
If the foregoing precautions are not fully
understood, clarification should be obtained
“Warning: Risk of fire, explosion or burns. Do not disas- from your nearest GNB representative.
semble, heat above 50°C or incinerate.” Batteries contain Local conditions may introduce situations
dilute (1.310 nominal specific gravity) sulfuric acid electrolyte not covered by GNB Safety Precautions. If
which can cause burns and other serious injury. In the event so, contact the nearest GNB representative
of contact with electrolyte, flush immediately and thoroughly for guidance with your particular safety prob-
with water. Secure medical attention immediately. lem; also refer to applicable federal, state
and local regulations as well as industry
When working with batteries, wear rubber apron and rubber standards.
gloves. Wear safety goggles or other eye protection. These
will help prevent injury if contact is made with the acid.­

DANGER 2.3.1 Static Discharge Precautions for Batteries


EXPLOSIVE GASES
When maintaining the batteries, care must be taken to prevent
build-up of static charge. This danger is particularly significant
when the worker is electrically isolated, i.e. working on a rub-
­­2.2 Explosive Gases ber mat or an epoxy painted floor or wearing rubber shoes.

Hydrogen gas formation is an inherent feature of all lead Prior to making contact with the cell, discharge static electric-
acid batteries. Absolyte GP VRLA batteries, however, ity by touching a grounded surface.
-1-
Charge) at 6 month intervals thereafter. Storage at elevated
Wearing a ground strap while working on a connected battery temperatures will result in accelerated rates of self discharge.
string is not recommended. For every 18°F (10°C) temperature increase above 77°F
(25°C), the time interval for
2.4
Safety Alert
The safety alert symbol on the left appears the initial freshening charge and subsequent freshening

!
throughout this manual. Where the symbol charges should be halved. Thus, if a battery is stored at
appears, obey the safety message to avoid 95°F (35°C), the maximum storage interval between charges
personal injury. would be 3 months (reference Appendix B). Storage beyond
these periods without proper charge can result in excessive
sulphation of plates and positive grid corrosion which is
2.5
Important Message detrimental to battery performance and life. Failure to charge
The symbol on the left indicates an impor- accordingly may void the battery’s warranty. Initial and
tant message. If not followed, damage to freshening charge data should be saved and included with the
and/or impaired performance of the battery battery historical records; (see Section 15 - Records).
may result.
SECTION 5
5.0 Installation Considerations
SECTION 3

3.0 Receipt of Shipment !


Prior to starting installation of the Absolyte Battery System, a
Immediately upon delivery, examine for possible damage review of this section is strongly recommended.
caused in transit. Damaged packing material or staining from
leaking electrolyte could indicate rough handling. Make a Any modifications, alterations or additions to
descriptive notation on the delivery receipt before signing. an Absolyte system, without the expressed
Look for evidence of top loading or dents in the steel mod- written consent of GNB Engineering, may void
ules. If cell or unit damage is found, request an inspection by any warranties and/or seismic qualifications.
the carrier and file a damage claim. Contact your GNB representative for additional
information.
3.1 Concealed Damage
5.1 Space Considerations
Within 10 days of receipt, examine all cells for concealed
It is important to know certain restrictions for the area where
damage. If damage is noted, immediately request an inspec-
the battery is to be located. First, a designated aisle space
tion by the carrier and file a concealed damage claim. Pay
should be provided to permit initial installation as well as for
particular attention to packing material exhibiting damage or
service or surveillance. After installation, any additional equip-
electrolyte staining. Delay in notifying carrier may result in
ment installed after the battery should not compromise access
loss of right to reimbursement for damages.
to the battery system.
A minimum aisle space of 36 inches from modules / 33 inches
SECTION 4 from covers should be available adjacent to the battery sys-
tem. See Figure 1 for typical space allocations required.
4.0 Storage Prior to Installation Following the spacing requirements will aid in maintenance
of the battery and help maintain air flow to battery surfaces to
4.1 Storage Location enhance heat dissipation.
NOTE: When planning system space requirements, allow at
If the battery is not to be installed at the time of receipt, it is least 6 inches past system total length wherever a terminal
recommended that it be stored indoors in a cool [77°F (25°C) plate assembly is to be located. (See Figure 1A)
or less], clean, dry location. Do not stack pallets or cell termi-
nal damage may occur. Figure 1 A-B are typical. For total length, width and height
dimensions of connected systems, consult layout/wiring dia-
4.2 Storage Interval gram for the particular system.

5.2 Battery Location & Ambient


The storage interval from the date of battery shipment to the
Temperature Requirements
date of installation and initial charge should not exceed six
(6) months. If extended storage is necessary, the battery It is recommended that the battery unit be installed in a clean,
should be charged at regular intervals until installation can cool, dry location. Floors should be level. Absolyte batteries
be completed and float charging can be initiated. When in can be installed in proximity to electronic equipment.
extended storage, it is advised to mark the battery pallets
A location having an ambient temperature of 75°F (24°C)
with the date of shipment and the date of every charge. If
to 77°F (25°C) will result in optimum battery life and perfor-
the battery is stored at 77°F (25°C) or below, the battery
mance. Temperatures below 77°F (25°C) reduce battery
should be given a freshening charge (perform per Section 11
charge efficiency and discharge performance. Temperatures
Initial Charge) within 6 months of the date of shipment and
above 77°F (25°C) will result in a reduction in battery life (see
receive a freshening charge (perform per Section 11 Initial
table below.)

-2-
FIGURE 1A - HORIZONTAL END TO END

FIGURE 1B - HORIZONTAL BACK TO BACK

FIGURE 1 - TYPICAL SYSTEMS (TOP VIEW)

-3-
Annual Average Maximum Percent
Battery Battery Reduction Four 9/16” (14.3 mm) holes are provided in each I-Beam
Temperature Temperature In Battery Life
support for anchoring. To maintain seismic certification, use
77°F (25°C) 122°F (50°C) 0% four anchor bolts per horizontal support. Anchor design is the
86°F (30°C) 122°F (50°C) 30% responsibility of the purchaser/installer.
95°F (35°C) 122°F (50°C) 50%
104°F (40°C) 122°F (50°C) 66%
113°F (45°C) 122°F (50°C) 75% 5.7 Connecting Cables: Battery
122°F (50°C) 122°F (50°C) 83% System to Operating Equipment
For example: If a battery has a design life of 20 years at 77°F
(25°C), but the actual annual average battery temperature is The Absolyte cell is a UL recognized component. Battery
95°F (35°C), the projected service life of the battery is calcu- performance is based on the output at the battery terminals.
lated to be only 10 years. Therefore, the shortest electrical connections between the
battery system and the operating equipment results in maxi-
Temperature records shall be maintained by the user in accor- mum total system performance.
dance with the maintanence schedule published in this manual.
The battery temperature shall not be allowed to exceed the DO NOT SELECT CABLE SIZE BASED ON CURRENT
maximum temperature shown above. It is important to maintain CARRYING CAPACITY ONLY. Cable size selection should
the battery temperature as close to 77°F (25°C) as possible to provide no greater voltage drop between the battery system
achieve the optimum service life from your battery. and operating equipment than necessary. Excess voltage drop
will reduce the desired support time of the battery system.
5.3 Temperature Variations
5.7.1 Paralleling
Sources of heat or cooling directed on portions of the battery
can cause temperature variations within the strings, resulting Where it is necessary to connect battery strings in parallel in
in cell voltage differences and eventual compromise of battery order to obtain sufficient load backup time, it is important to
performance. minimize the difference in voltage drop between the battery
strings in parallel in order to promote equal load sharing upon
Heat sources such as heaters, sunlight or associated equipment discharge. Therefore, equal resistance of cable connections
can cause such temperature variations. Similarly, air condition- for each parallel string is important. When paralleling multiple
ing or outside air vents may cause cell string temperature varia- strings to a load or common bus, please follow these guidelines:
tions. Every effort should be made to keep temperature varia-
tions within 5°F (3°C). • Each parallel string must have the same number of cells

!
(same string voltage).
5.4 Ventilation • The cables connecting the positive and negative terminals of
each string to the load (or bus) should be of the SAME SIZE
The Absolyte battery is a Valve Regulated Lead Acid (VRLA) (i.e. same capacity/cross-sectional area).
low maintenance design. Tests have confirmed that under • The cables connecting the positive and negative terminals
recommended operating conditions in stationary applications, of each string to the load (or bus) should be of the SAME
99% or more of gases generated are recombined within the LENGTH. Choose the shortest cable length that will connect
cell. In most cases, no special ventilation and or battery room the battery string that is furthest from the load, and cut all
is required. Consult your local building and fire codes for cables used to connect each string to the load to this same
requirements that may apply to your specific location. length.

Hydrogen and oxygen gases can be vented to the atmosphere 5.8 Stacking Limitations
under certain conditions. Therefore, the battery should never be
installed in an air-tight enclosure. Sufficient precautions must be There are recommended limits on stacked battery configura-
taken to prevent excessive overcharge. tions. Please refer to Appendix D for additional information.

!
NOTE: Horizontal module arrangement only.
5.5 Floor Loading
5.9 Terminal Plates
The floor of the area where the battery system is to be
installed should have the capability of supporting the weight Each system is supplied with a terminal plate assembly for
of the battery as well as any auxiliary equipment. The total the positive and negative terminations. These should always
battery weight will depend on the cell size, number of cells, be used to provide proper connection to the operating equip-
as well as module configuration involved. Prior to installa- ment and cell terminals. Any attempt to connect load cables
tion, a determination should be made that the floor integrity is directly to cell terminal may compromise battery system per-
adequate to accommodate the battery system. formance as well as the integrity of cell post seals.

5.6 Floor Anchoring 5.10 Grounding

Where seismic conditions are anticipated, floor anchoring It is recommended that the modules or racks be grounded in
must be implemented. accordance with NEC and/or local codes. See Appendix C for
recommended procedure.
Where non-seismic conditions are anticipated, anchoring of hori-
zontally stacked systems is recommended for maximum stability.

-4-
SECTION 6 6.3 Recommended Installation
Equipment and Supplies
6.0 Unpacking and Handling
• Fork lift or portable boom crane
• Chalk line
• Line Cord
• Torpedo level (Plastic)
• Plywood straight edge 1/2” x 4” x 48”
• Torque wrenches
• Ratchet wrench with 10, 13, 17, 19 mm sockets and 2
and 15 mm deep sockets
• Box wrenches of 10, 13, 15, 17 and 19 mm sizes
• Vinyl electrical tape
• Paper wipers
• 3M Scotch Brite® scour-pads™†
• Hammer drill (floor anchoring)

† Trademark of 3M

6.4 Unpacking
PACKED MODULES
Carefully remove bolts and protective shipping hood. See
Figure 2
Figure 3. Remove the bolts holding modules to shipping pal-
let. Also remove hardware bolting upper channels of modules
6.1 General together. Do not remove modules at this time. Base supports
for horizontally stacked modules are more easily attached
Do not remove shipping materials if a storage period is before removing modules from pallet (see Section 8.0 System
planned, unless charging is required per Section 4.2. Assembly and Section 9.0 Connections).

The battery modules are generally packed in groups. Lag Note: Placement of modules on shipping pallet has no rela-
bolts retain the modules to the shipping pallet together with tionship to final installation.
a protective hood bolted in place. Modules are also bolted
together at the top adjacent channels. See Figure 2.

6.2 Accessories

Accessories are packed separately and will include the


following: (Note: Some items may not be provided depending
on battery configuration).

• Layout/wiring diagram
• Installation and operating instructions
• Lifting straps and lifting shackles
• Protective covers and hardware
• Terminal plate assembly kits and covers
• Module tie plates (where required) (i.e. side-by-side
stacks)
• Vertical or horizontal supports (i.e. I-beams)
• Lead-Tin Plated copper intercell connectors UNPACKING MODULES
• Assembly hardware Figure 3



• NO-OX-ID® “A”* grease
• Battery warning label
• Battery nameplate
6.5 Handling
!
• Cell numerals with polarity indicators
• Shims (leveling) The design of the modular tray permits handling by a fork lift,
• Drift pins portable crane or by a hoist sling (see Figure 4). Whichever
• Seismic Shims (where required). Included with systems method is used, make sure equipment can safely handle the
containing stacks of 7 or more modules in height. module weight.

*Registered Trademark of Sanchem Inc. Always use the two lifting straps and four lifting shackles for
lifting and placement of modules.
NOTE: Check battery components against supplied drawings
to assure completeness. Do not proceed with installation until
all accessory parts are available.

-5-
CAUTION!
If a fork lift or portable crane is used
to handle modules in a horizontal
position, a piece of insulating mate-
rial such as heavy cardboard, rubber
insulating mats or plywood should be
used between handling equipment and
module tops to prevent shorting of
module top connections with metal
parts of lift equipment.

Figure 6A

NOTE:
1) Straps must be criss-crossed.
2) Lifting shackle orientation and proper channel hole use
must be observed.
3) See Figure 14 for handling modules in horizontal orientation.
4) Never lift more than two joined modules with straps and hooks.
Figure 6B
HANDLING - LIFTING STRAP PLACEMENT
Figure 4

SECTION 7

7.0 System Arrangements

7.1 Module Arrangements

Absolyte batteries are recommended for installation in a


horizontal orientation only. However, vertical installation is
approved for 50G systems consisting of single cell modules.
Figures 6 and 7 are typical arrangements and are not intend-
ed to represent all configuration possibilities.

Module stack height limitation depends on cell size and


the seismic requirements of the application. Please refer to
Appendix D for additional information.
HORIZONTAL SINGLE STACK BACK TO BACK

Figure 6C

-6-
NOTE: The use of leveling shims is required when assembling
any Absolyte system in order to meet seismic requirements.
Failure to use the shims to level each module and to fill spac-
es between tray channels during module assembly will result
in the assembly not meeting seismic certification criteria.

Similarly, install the remaining I-beam support on the other


side of the module (see Figure 10).

M10 x 40 BOLT

M10 FLAT WASHER


HORIZONTAL MULTIPLE STACKS
BACK TO BACK AND END TO END
TYPICAL HORIZONTAL STACK ARRANGEMENTS M10 WEDGE WASHER
Figure 7 M10 LOCK WASHER
M10 NUT

7.2 Dummy Cells within a Module

Where application voltage requires, a dummy cell can replace HARDWARE INSTALLATION FOR 2.67” WIDE I-BEAM SUPPORT
a live cell in a module. For example, a 46 volt, three-cell per Figure 8
module system may consist of seven full modules and one
module containing two live cells and either an empty space,
or a dummy cell.

SECTION 8

8.0 System Assembly


ACCESS SLOTS
8.1 Horizontal Single Stack

Consult layout/wiring diagram for total number and type of


M10 NUT
module assemblies in system. There can be varying combi- LOCK WASHER I-BEAM SUPPORT
nations of cell arrangements within the module. May contain WASHER
dummy cells depending on total system voltage. SEISMIC SHIM
WASHER
M10 BOLT
Compare required module assemblies called for on layout/
wiring diagram with modules in shipment for completeness HARDWARE INSTALLATION FOR 4.5” WIDE I-BEAM SUPPORT
Figure 9
before continuing further.

8.1.1 Bottom I-beam Supports

Locate bottom I-beam supports and M10 I-beam hardware


kit. I-beam supports and seismic shims should be attached to
the appropriate module assembly shown on the layout/wiring
diagram prior to removal from shipping pallet.

NOTE: Seismic shims will be supplied with systems for which


they are required to maintain seismic compliance.

Secure I-beam support to a module channel as shown in supplied


drawing, with access slots outward. Please refer to Figure 8 and 9
for general hardware installation information. Seismic shims, when
supplied, are placed between the channel and the nut and oriented
so as to not extend beyond the end of the channel. Torque hard-
ware to 47 Newton-meters (35 ft-lbs) using insulated tools. When
correctly attached, the I-beam support will be flush with the front
module channel and approximately 13mm (0.50”) away from the
back of the module. The side of the I-beam support will be approxi- COMPLETED I-BEAM SUPPORT TO MODULE INSTALLATION
mately 10mm (0.38”) away from the end of the channels. Figure 10

-7-
8.1.2 Handling E. Where floor anchoring is required, position module/base
assembly in desired location. Mark floor through I-beam
The module/base support assembly may now be removed holes and remove module/base assembly. Install floor
from the pallet using methods outlined in section 6.5, anchoring and reposition module/base assembly over
Handling. Also see Figure 11. Remaining modules may be anchoring. Prior to installing nuts and washers, check that
removed in a similar manner. assembly is level in both axes. Level using shims pro-
vided. Torque anchor hardware to manufacturer’s recom-
mended value.
8.1.3 Horizontal Stacking

In order to stack modules in the horizontal position, refer to


Figures 11 thru 13 to perform the tip-over procedure. The
module/base support assembly tip-over should be performed
first. This procedure can be performed using a portable boom
crane or fork lift in conjunction with the lifting straps and lifting
shackles supplied.

CAUTION!
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO PERFORM TIP-OVER OF
MODULE MANUALLY AS SERIOUS PERSONAL
INJURY AND MODULE DAMAGE MAY RESULT.

A. Install lifting strap using lifting shackles in channel base


holes at each end of module upper rear channel as
shown in Figure 12A.

B. Center the lifting hook onto strap and lift until strap is
under tension and raises bottom of module from floor
surface so that upper and lower diagonal corners are in a
vertical mode.

C. While exerting manual force on the upper rear of module,


lower hoist until module is in horizontal position.
See Figures 12B and 13. NOTE:
1) One strap with shackles used for tip-over

!
D. When module is horizontal, install the four lifting shackles procedure.
and two lifting straps as shown in Figure 14. 2) Observe channel hole used as well as direction of
shackle insertion.
3) Tip over procedure for single modules only.

TIP OVER PROCEDURE


SHACKLE-STRAP USAGE
Figure 12A

F. U
 sing Steps A-D and the layout/wiring diagram, position
the next module on top of first so that channels of each
mate with one another using drift pins to align channel
holes. Make sure channel ends and sides of the upper
and lower modules are flush. Install serrated flange bolts
and nuts in open holes, finger tight. Remove lifting straps.
Use leveling shims to fill gaps between trays. See Figures
15, 16, and 17A.

G. At this time, check to see that the first two modules are
plumb front to back and side to side using wooden or
plastic level together with plywood straight edge. This is
to insure proper alignment for module interconnection
later on. Torque hardware to 47 Newton-meters
(35 Ft-Lbs).

HANDLING MODULE - BASE SUPPORT ASSEMBLY


Figure 11

-8-
TIP-OVER PROCEDURE MODULE WITH BASE ASSEMBLY
Figure 12B AFTER TIP-OVER
Figure 13

NOTE:
1) Straps must be criss-crossed
2) Lifting shackle orientation and proper channel hole use

!



must be observed.
3) See Figure 4 for handling modules in vertical orientation.
4) Lift single modules only.

HORIZONTAL STACKING SHACKLE-STRAP USAGE


Figure 14

-9-
H. Proceed with stacking of remaining modules, checking
that stack is plumb in both axes as stacking progresses
before torquing hardware. Be certain to check the
layout/wiring diagram for correct horizontal orientation to
provide proper polarity interconnection as stacking
progresses. See Figure 17B.

COMPLETED HORIZONTAL STACK


Figure 17B

8.2 Horizontal-Multiple Stacks


HANDLING AND STACKING HORIZONTAL MODULES It is recommended that all of the first modules with bottom
Figure 15 supports attached (see Section 8.1.1) be placed in position
first. A chalk line floor mark should be used to assure all
stacks will be in a straight line. This applies for stacks end-
to-end or end-to-end and back-to-back. Also refer to Section
8.1.3, Items A through H (Item E for base module leveling).
Module ends should be butted together so that module side
channel ends meet (see Figure 18).
Refer to layout/wiring diagram for seismic shim requirements.
M10 SERRATED
FLANGE BOLT  t this time stack tie plates should be installed (see Section
A
8.2.1). It will be necessary to temporarily remove the hard-
ware fastening the base modules to the I-beams.
See Figure 20A. Install tie plates and hardware. Torque to 47
M10 SERRATED
FLANGE NUT Newton-meters (35 Ft-Lbs).
For stacks back-to-back, the two base modules are posi-
tioned to provide a minimum 4.5” spacing between the bot-
HARDWARE INSTALLATION SEQUENCE toms of the modules (not I-beam edges). See Figure 19A.
Figure 16 When all base modules are set in place, continue with stack-
ing of subsequent modules. Procedures for assembly of
multiple horizontal stacks are the same as outlined in section
9.1. Also consult layout/wiring diagram. Each stack should be
built up in sequence to the same level until the top modules
in all stacks are the last to be installed. The use of a line cord
attached to upper module corners of opposite end modules
as stacking progresses aids in alignment. See Figure 19B.

INSTALLING HARDWARE
Figure 17A
POSITIONING HORIZONTAL BASE MODULE
Figure 18
- 10 -
SEISMIC SHIM
INSTALLED UNDER
TIE PLATE WHERE
APPLICABLE

HORIZONTAL STACKS — BACK TO BACK POSITIONING


Figure 19A

TIE PLATE BOTTOM MODULES


Figure 20A

COMPLETED HORIZONTAL STACKS — SIDE BY SIDE


Figure 19B

M10 SERRATED
8.2.1 Stack Tie Plate ­­ FLANGE BOLT

To achieve maximum stack stability, especially where seismic


conditions may exist, as well as proper interfacing of inter-
stack connections, metal tie plates are provided. The plates
used on stacks end to end are 3” x 1” x 1/8” with two 9/16”
holes. Use one tie plate at each interface on only the base
and top modules of adjacent stacks. See Figures 20A and
20B.

Position plates on the front and back channels and secure


with hardware shown. Where stacks have different levels,
install plates on shorter stack top module and adjacent mod-
ule. Torque hardware to 47 Newton-meters (35 Ft-Lbs).

This completes the mechanical assembly of the battery system.

For installation of connections and terminal plate assembly, M10 SERRATED


FLANGE NUT
see Section 9.

For installation of protective module cover, see Section 10.


TIE PLATE TOP MODULES
Figure 20B

- 11 -
SECTION 9 Cells are interconnected with connectors and hardware as
shown in Figures 21A and 21B
9.0 Connections
9.4 Connections - INTER-Stack
9.1 Post Preparation
Multiple stacks end to end are interconnected as shown in
Using either a brass bristle suede shoe brush or 3M Scotch Figure 21C and 21D. Follow procedures in Section 9.1 and
Brite scouring pad, brighten the flat copper terminal surfaces Section 9.3. Also see Section 9.5, Connections - Torquing.
to ensure lowest resistance connections.
9.5 Connections - Torquing
Apply a thin film of NO-OX-ID “A” grease (supplied with bat-
tery) to all terminal mating surfaces. This will preclude oxida-

!
tion after connections are completed.

9.2 Connections - System Terminals


When all inter-module connections have been installed, tight-
Each system is supplied with a terminal plate assembly en all connections to 11.3 Newton-meters (100 in-lbs) Use
for the positive and negative terminations. These should insulated tools. All connections should be rechecked after
always be used to provide proper connection to the operating the initial charge, due to heating during charge.
equipment and cell terminals. Any attempt to connect load
cables directly to cell terminals may compromise battery sys-
9.6 Connection - Check
tem performance as well as the integrity of cell post seals.

For terminal plate assembly, see Figure 22 (6 cell modules Again, visually check to see that all module terminals are
at low rate) or Figure 23. Consult layout/wiring diagram for connected positive (+) to negative (-) throughout the battery.
proper kit use. It is recommended that all components be
assembled in place with hardware torqued to 11.3 Newton- Also measure the total voltage from terminal plate to terminal
meters (100 in-lbs). Retorque value is also 11.3 Newton- plate. This should be approximately equal to 2.15 volts times
meters (100 in-lbs). the number of cells in the system, e.g., a 24 cell system
would read: 24 x 2.15v = 51.6 volts.
Refer to Sections 9.1 and 9.3 for electrical contact surface
preparation of terminal plate components. 9.7 Connection Resistance
As shown, terminal plate assembly can be varied to satisfy Electrical integrity of connections can be objectively estab-
module terminal location as well as orientation of terminal lished by measuring the resistance of each connection.
plate in a horizontal or vertical plane. Do not make connec- These resistances are typically in the microhm range.
tions to operating system at this time. Meters are available which determine connection resistance
in microhms. Be sure that the probes are touching only the
9.3 Connections - INTER-Module posts to ensure that the contact resistance of connector to
post is included in the reading.
Consult layout/wiring diagram for correct quantity of lead-
Resistance measurements or microhm measurements
tin plated copper connectors required at each connection.
should be taken at the time of installation and annually there-
Follow procedure in Section 9.1 and brighten lead-tin plated
after. Initial measurements at installation become the bench
surfaces coming in contact with copper posts. Apply a film
mark values and should be recorded for future monitoring of
of NO-OX-ID “A” grease to these areas. NOTE: Apply a
electrical integrity.
minimum amount of grease to cover the surface. As a rule:
“If you can see it, it’s too much”. Where multiple connectors
It is important that the bench mark value for all similar con-
are required across any single connection, brighten both
nections be no greater than 10% over the average. If any
sides of connectors along the entire length. Grease these
connection resistance exceeds the average by more than
areas as well. It is recommended when installing connec-
10%, the connection should be remade so that an accept-
tors that the upper bolts be installed first to reduced risk of
able bench mark value is established.
accidental shorting.
Bench mark values for connection resistances should also
WASHERS SHOULD BE INSTALLED WITH THE CURVED
be established for terminal plates, where used, as well as
EDGE TOWARD THE CONNECTORS.
cable connections. Bench mark values should preferably be
established upon installation.

All bench mark values should be recorded. Annually, all con-


nection resistances should be re-measured. Any connection
which has a resistance value 20% above its benchmark
value should be corrected.
BOLT WASHER CONNECTOR POST

- 12 -
TWO POST CELLS FOUR POST CELLS
INTER-MODULE CONNECTION INTER-MODULE CONNECTION
A B

TWO POST CELLS FOUR POST CELLS


INTER-STACK CONNECTION INTER-STACK CONNECTION
C D

1) See Section 9 - Connections


2) Torque hardware to 11.3 Newton-meters (100 in-lbs).
3) C
 onsult layout/wiring diagram received with battery
system
4) Curved edge of washer should face the connector.

VARIOUS INTER STACK AND


INTER-MODULE CONNECTIONS
HORIZONTAL ARRANGEMENTS

Figure 21

- 13 -
Figure 22

- 14 -
CABLE LUGS
(NOT SUPPLIED)

MODULE
CHANNELS

Figure 23

- 15 -
TO ASSEMBLE THE ABSOLYTE GP MODULE COVER, THE FOLLOWING ARE NEEDED:

ITEM QUANTITY

CLEAR COVER 1
STANDOFF LEG 4
KEY 4
TOP CLOSEOUT 1*
*TOP MODULE COVER ONLY

TOP MODULE
COVER

INSTALL TOP CLOSEOUT ON TO INSTALL COVERS ONTO


7 8
CLEAR COVER OF TOP MODULE: STANDOFF LEGS.
CUT TO ALLOW FOR TERMINAL
PLATE AS REQUIRED

INSTALLATION GUIDE FOR ABSOLYTE GP MODULE COVER

Figure 24

- 16 -
9.8 Cell Numerals Failure to perform the freshening charge within the limits
stated in Section as well as failure to perform the initial
A set of pressure sensitive cell numerals and system polarity charge upon installation of the battery 4 will affect the per-
labels are supplied and should be applied at this time. formance and life of the battery and may void the warranty.

Cell numerals should be applied to the top of the module and 11.1 Constant Voltage Method
as close to the cell being identified as possible. Suggest appli-
cation to cell restraint bars or to module channels. Designate Constant voltage is the only charging method allowed. Most
the positive terminal cell as #1 with succeeding cells in series modern chargers are of the constant voltage type.
in ascending order.
Determine the maximum voltage that may be applied to the
The system polarity labels should be applied next to the posi- system equipment. This voltage, divided by the number of
tive and negative terminals. cells connected in series, will establish the maximum volts per
cell (VPC) that is available.
9.9 Warning Label
! Table B lists recommended voltages and charge times for the
initial charge. Select the highest voltage the system allows to
Apply pressure sensitive warning label provided on a promi-
perform the initial charge in the shortest time period.
nently visible module side or end (The module cover is rec-
ommended).
NOTE: Time periods listed in Table B are for 77°F. For other
temperatures a compensation factor of .003 V/°F (.0055 V/°C)
9.10 Battery Nameplate per cell is recommended. The minimum voltage is 2.20 VPC,
temperature correction does not apply below this voltage.
For future reference and warranty protection, apply pressure
sensitive nameplate on a prominently visible module. Fill in TEMPERATURE CORRECTION
date of installation and the specified capacity and rate.
V corrected = V25°C - (( T actual-25°C) x ( .0055V/°C)) or
Make sure surfaces are free of dirt and grease by wiping with V corrected = V77°F - ((T actual-77°F) x (.003V/°F))
clean, dry wipers to ensure proper label adhesion. See Appendix A for standard values.

For protective module cover installation, see Section 10. STEP 1

A. Set constant voltage charger to maximum setting without


SECTION 10 exceeding 2.35 VPC. Example: For a target charge of

!
2.35 VPC on a 24-cell system, you would set the charger
10.0 Protective Module Covers voltage to 56.4 volts.

Each module is provided with a transparent protective cover Depending on the battery’s state of charge, the charger
to help prevent accidental contact with live module electrical may go into current limit at the beginning and decline
connections, and to provide easy visual access to the system. slowly once the target charge voltage is reached.

When all system assembly has been completed, as well as B. Record time and current at regular intervals – every hour
initial testing including initial charge and cell float voltage as a minimum.
readings, all covers should be installed. Covers should remain
in place at all times during normal operation of the battery C. Continue charging the battery until there is no further drop
system. in charge current over 3 consecutive hours. This could
take days if the battery has been in storage for a long time.
10.1 Module Cover Installation
D. When the current has stabilized, proceed to step 2.
Refer to Figure 24 for installation of the transparent Module
Covers. Install standoff legs and standoff keys first, as STEP 2
shown.
A. C ontinue the charge for the time listed in Table B
The cover is then installed by grasping it so that the GNB logo depending on the charger voltage setting. The time is IN
is upright. Locate slots at the bottom of cover to the bottom ADDITION to the time spent charging in Step 1. Example,
standoff legs and slide in place. Locate the holes at top of charge for 12 hours if the charger voltage is set to 2.35
cover and install to top standoff legs.Refer to Figure 24. VPC.
TABLE B

SECTION 11 INITIAL CHARGE (77°F)


CELL VOLTS TIME-HRS (Minimum)
11.0 Initial Charge 2.30 24
2.35 12
Batteries lose some charge during shipment as well as dur-
ing the period prior to installation. A battery should be given B. Record cell voltages hourly during the last 3 hours of the
its initial charge at installation. Battery positive (+) terminal charge time. If, after the charge time has completed, but
should be connected to charger positive (+) terminal and bat- the lowest cell voltage has continued to rise, you may
tery negative (-) terminal to charger negative (-) terminal. extend the charge, monitoring cell voltages hourly, until the
lowest cell voltage ceases to rise.
- 17 -
C. Proceed to Step 3. TEMPERATURE CORRECTION
V corrected = V25°C - (( T actual-25°C) x ( .0055V/°C)) or
STEP 3 V corrected = V77°F - ((T actual-77°F) x (.003V/°F))

The initial charge is complete. Charger voltage can now be See Appendix A for standard values.
reduced to float voltage setting per Section 12.2. For a target
float charge of 2.25 VPC on a 24-cell system, you would set Modern constant voltage output charging equipment is recom-
the charger voltage to 54 volts. mended for the floating charger method of operation of GNB
Absolyte batteries. This type of charger, properly adjusted to the
recommended float voltages and following recommended surveil-
SECTION 12 lance procedures, will assist in obtaining consistent serviceability
and optimum life.
12.0 Operation
After the battery has been given its initial charge (refer to
12.0.1 Cycle Method of Operation Section 11), the charger should be adjusted to provide the
recommended float voltages at the battery terminals.
In cycle operation, the degree of discharge will vary for dif-
Do not use float voltages higher or lower than those recom-
ferent applications. Therefore, the frequency of recharging
mended. Reduced capacity or battery life will result.
and the amount of charge necessary will vary. The amount
of charge necessary depends on the number of ampere
Check and record battery terminal voltage on a regular
hours discharged. Generally, Absolyte GP cells require
basis. Monthly checks are recommended. See Section 15.0,
approximately 105-110% of the ampere-hours removed to be Records, second bullet. If battery float voltage is above or
returned to achieve a full state of charge. below the correct value, adjust charger to provide proper volt-
age as measured at the battery terminals.
The upper voltage settings recommended, given that the
maxium charge current is 5% of the nominal C100 Amp-hour 12.3 Voltmeter Calibration
rating and ambient temperatures of 25°C (77°F), are as fol-
lows:
Panel and portable voltmeters used to indicate battery float
2.28 ± 0.02 VPC @ 0-2% DOD
voltages should be accurate at the operating voltage value.
2.33 ± 0.02 VPC @ 3-5% DOD The same holds true for portable meters used to read indi-
2.38 ± 0.02 VPC @ >5% DOD vidual cell voltages. These meters should be checked against
a standard every six months and calibrated when necessary.
Due to the variety of applications and charging equipment
(particularly in Photovoltaic systems) it is recommended that
you contact an GNB representative when determining proper 12.4 Recharge
recharge profiles.
All batteries should be recharged as soon as possible follow-
ing a discharge with constant voltage chargers. However, to
12.1 Floating Charge Method
recharge in the shortest period of time, raise the charger out-
put voltage to the highest value which the connected system
In this type of operation, the battery is connected in parallel will permit. Do not exceed the voltages and times listed in
with a constant voltage charger and the critical load circuits. Table C, Section 13.2.
The charger should be capable of maintaining the required
constant voltage at battery terminals and also supply a nor-
12.5 Determining State-of-Charge
mal connected load where applicable. This sustains the bat-
tery in a fully charged condition and also makes it available
to assume the emergency power requirements in the event of If the normal connected load is constant (no emergency load
an AC power interruption or charger failure. connected), the following method can be used to determine
the approximate state-of-charge of the battery. The state-of-
charge can be identified to some degree by the amount of
12.2 Float Charge - Float Voltages charging current going to the battery. When initially placed
on charge or recharge following a discharge, the charging
Following are the float voltage ranges recommended for the current, read at the charger ammeter, will be a combination
Absolyte Battery System. Select any “volts per cell” (VPC) of the load current plus the current necessary to charge the
value within the range listed that will result in the series string battery. The current to the battery will start to decrease and
having an average volts per cell equal to that value. will finally stabilize when the battery becomes fully charged.
If the current level remains constant for three consecutive
RECOMMENDED FLOAT RANGE (@77°F) hours, then this reflects a state-of-charge of approximately 95
2.23 to 2.27 VPC to 98%. For most requirements, the battery is ready for use.

NOTE: Recommended float voltages are for 77°F. For other If the normal connected load is variable (i.e. telecommunica-
temperatures a compensation factor of .003 V/°F (.0055 V/°C) tions), the following method may be used to check the state-
per cell is recommended. The minimum voltage is 2.20 VPC, of-charge of the battery. Measure the voltage across a pilot
temperature correction does not apply below this voltage. The cell (See Section 14.0 for definition of pilot cell). If the voltage
maximum voltage is 2.35 VPC, temperature correction does not is stable for 24 consecutive hours, the battery reflects a state
apply above this voltage. of charge of approximately 95%.

- 18 -
12.6 Effects of Float Voltage “Reference” ohmic values are of dubious value because so
many factors can affect the way the readings are made and
Float voltage has a direct effect on the service life displayed by the devices. Connector configuration and AC
of your battery and can be the cause of thermal instability. ripple as well as differences between readings of temperature
and probe placement will prevent the ohmic devices from
A float voltage above the recommended values reduces ser- generating consistent and meaningful data. The meters work
vice life. The chart below shows the effects of float voltage better with monoblocs and small capacity VRLA products
(temperature corrected) on battery life. and less well with large (>800-Ah) VRLA and flooded battery
designs. Users should be particularly skeptical of data
Temperature corrected 77°F (25°C) Percent
taken on series-parallel VRLA battery configurations as the
Float voltage per cell Reduction
feedback signal to the device may follow unforeseen paths
Minimum Maximum in Battery Life
that can overwhelm it.
2.23 2.27 0%
2.28 2.32 50% It is best for users to establish their own baseline values
2.33 2.37 75% for their battery as specifically configured. Do not rely on
Voltage records must be maintained by the user in accor- reference values.
dance with the maintanence schedule published in this manual.
To obtain the optimum service life from the battery, it is impor- If users wish to enhance normal maintenance and record-
tant to make sure the battery’s float voltage is within the rec- keeping with ohmic measurements, GNB recommends the
ommended range. trending of this data over time. Use a first set of readings
taken 6 months after initial charge and installation as the
baseline data. Subsequent measurements should be taken
12.7 Float Current and Thermal Management
using the same device over the life of the battery. Because
Increased float current can portend a condition known as cell positioning within the string (connector configuration to a
thermal runaway, where the battery produces more heat than particular cell) can affect the reading, always compare each
it can dissipate. VRLA batteries are more prone to thermal cell at baseline to itself in the new data. Standalone ohmic
runaway because the recombination reaction that occurs at data is not sufficient to justify warranty cell replacement.
the negative plate, and reduces water loss, also produces
Responsible ohmic device manufacturers acknowledge that
heat. High room temperature, improper applications,
there is no direct relationship between percent ohmic change
improper voltage settings, and incorrect installation practices
from baseline and battery capacity. A change from baseline
can increase the chances of thermal runaway.
of 25% or less is in the normal noise or variability range.
As with good record-keeping practices, monitoring float Changes between 25% and 50% may call for additional
current can prevent a minor excursion from becoming a scrutiny of the system. An IEEE compliant discharge test is
major issue. usually warranted on systems exhibiting more than a 50%
change from baseline. Consult an GNB representative for
12.8 AC Ripple specific questions about ohmic data.

AC ripple is noise or leftover AC waveform riding on the DC SECTION 13


charge current to the battery that the rectifier did not remove.
It is usually more pronounced in UPS than telecom systems. 13.0 Equalizing Charge
Proper maintenance of the UPS capacitors will reduce the
amount of ripple going into the battery. Under normal operating conditions an equalizing charge is
not required. An equalizing charge is a special charge given
Establishment of absolute limits for AC ripple has always a battery when non-uniformity in voltage has developed
been problematic because the degree of damage it causes between cells. It is given to restore all cells to a fully charged
depends on the wave shape, peak-to-peak magnitude and condition. Use a charging voltage higher than the normal float
frequency. Accurate characterization of AC ripple requires an voltage and for a specified number of hours, as determined by
oscilloscope and even then, only represents a picture of the the voltage used.
ripple at that moment in time.
Non-uniformity of cells may result from low float voltage due
Whatever its exact characteristics, AC ripple is always to improper adjustment of the charger or a panel voltmeter
harmful to batteries. Depending on its particular properties, which reads an incorrect (higher) output voltage. Also, varia-
ripple can result in overcharge, undercharge and micro- tions in cell temperatures greater than 5°F (2.78°C) in the
cycling that can prematurely age the battery. The most series string at a given time, due to environmental conditions
common and damaging result of AC ripple is battery heating or module arrangement, can cause low cells.
which can lead to thermal runaway. AC ripple will decrease
battery life and should be reduced as much as possible.
13.1 Equalizing Frequency
An equalizing charge should be given when the following con-
12.9 Ohmic Measurements ditions exist:
Impedance, resistance and conductance testing is collectively A. The float voltage of any cell (as per Section 14.0) is less
known in the industry as ohmic measurements. Each than 2.18 VPC.
measurement is derived using a manufacturer-specific and
proprietary algorithm and / or frequency. This means that one B. A recharge of the battery is required in a minimum time
type of measurement cannot be converted or related easily to period following an emergency discharge.
another.

- 19 -
C. Individual cell(s) float is more than +/- 0.05 volts from aver- charge, monitoring cell voltages hourly, until the lowest cell
age. voltage ceases to rise.
D. Accurate periodic records (See Section 15) of individual C. Proceed to Step 3.
cell voltages show an increase in spread since the previ-
ous semi-annual readings. STEP 3
An annual equalize charge is recommended to help ensure
The Equalize charge is now complete. Charger voltage can
uniform cell performance.
now be reduced to float voltage setting per Section 12.2. For
a target float charge of 2.25 VPC on a 24-cell system, you
13.2 Equalizing Charge Method would set the charger voltage to 54 volts.

Constant voltage charging is the method for giving an equal- SECTION 14


izing charge. Determine the maximum voltage that may be
applied to the system equipment. This voltage, divided by the 14.0 Pilot Cell
number of cells connected in series, will establish the maxi-
mum volts per cell that may be used to perform the equalizing A pilot cell is selected in the series string to reflect the gen-
charge in the shortest period of time (not to exceed 2.35 VPC eral condition of cells in the battery. The cell selected should
applicable at 77°F, 25°C). Refer to Table C for voltages and be the lowest cell voltage in the series string following the
recommended time periods. initial charge. See Section 11.0 - Initial Charge. Reading and
recording pilot cell voltage monthly serves as an indicator of
NOTE: Charge volts listed in Table C are for 77°F. For other battery condition between scheduled overall individual cell
temperatures a compensation factor of .003 V/°F (.0055 readings.
V/°C) per cell is recommended. The minimum voltage is
2.20 VPC. The maximum voltage is 2.35 VPC. Temperature
correction does not apply outside of this range.
SECTION 15

V corrected = V25°C - ((T actual-25°C) x (.0055 V/°C))or 15.0 Records


V corrected = V77°F - ((T actual-77°F) x (.003 V/°F))
The following information must be recorded at installation,
See Appendix A for standard values. and annually for every year of operation after installation.
These records must be maintained throughout the
STEP 1 life of the battery and made available for review by GNB
representatives for capacity or life related warranty claims.
A. Set constant voltage charger to maximum setting without Failure to collect and store these maintenance data will void
exceeding 2.35 VPC. the warranty. Please review the warranty statement specific
to the battery application for any additional requirements.
Example: For a target charge of 2.35 VPC on a 24-cell
system, you would set the charger voltage to 56.4 volts. • Individual cell voltages

B. Record time and current at regular intervals – every hour • Overall string voltage
as a minimum.
• Ambient temperature immediately surrounding battery
C. Continue charging the battery until there is no further drop
in charge current over 3 consecutive hours. • Battery temperature at several places throughout the string.
Recommend 1 reading per battery stack. More data points
D. When the current has stabilized, proceed to step 2. are recommended for larger batteries and to check for
temperature gradients. Readings on the tray, cell cover
STEP 2 or negative terminal are good places to measure battery
temperature. Take readings away from HVAC sources.
A. Continue the charge for the time listed in Table C
depending on the charger voltage setting. The time is IN • F loat current measured at stack to stack connections
ADDITION to the time spent charging in Step 1. (optional)

Example, charge for 12 hours if the charger voltage is set to • Ohmic measurements (optional). Baseline ohmic readings
2.35 VPC. of individual cells should be taken 6 months from the date of
initial charge.
TABLE C
• Retorque connectors as part of annual maintenance.
EQUALIZE CHARGE (77°F)
ONCE PER YEAR READINGS ARE THE ABSOLUTE
CELL VOLTS TIME (HOURS) MINIMUM REQUIRED TO PROTECT WARRANTY. More
2.30 24 frequent readings are recommended, especially for critical
2.35 12 sites. Good record-keeping will prevent minor issues from
escalating into more serious problems over time. See Figure
B. Record cell voltages hourly during the last 3 hours of the 25 for sample record-keeping form.
charge time. If, after the charge time has completed, but the
lowest cell voltage has continued to rise, you may extend the

- 20 -
SECTION 16 SECTION 19

16.0 Tap Connections 19.0 Connections

Tap connections should not be used on a battery. This can Battery terminals and intercell connections should be cor-
cause overcharging of the unused cells and undercharging of rosion free and tight for trouble-free operation. Periodically
those cells supplying the load, thus reducing battery life. these connections should be inspected.

SECTION 17

17.0 Temporary Non-Use


! CAUTION!

DO NOT WORK ON CONNECTIONS


An installed battery that is expected to stand idle longer WITH BATTERY CONNECTED TO
than the maximum storage interval (see Sec. 4.2), should be
CHARGER OR LOAD.
treated as stated below. The maximum storage interval is 6
months if stored at 77°F.
If corrosion is present, disconnect the connector from the ter-
Give the battery an equalizing charge as per Section 13. minal.
Following the equalizing charge, open connections at the bat-
tery terminals to remove charger and load from the battery. Gently clean the affected area using a suede brush or Scotch
Brite scouring pad. Apply a thin coating of NO-OX-ID “A”
Repeat the above after every 6 months (77°F) or at the grease to the cleaned contact surfaces, reinstall connectors
required storage interval. See Section 4.2 for adjustments and retorque connections to 11.3 Newton-meters (100 inch
to storage intervals when the storage temperature exceeds pounds).
77°F.
ALL TERMINAL AND INTERCELL CONNECTIONS SHOULD
To return the battery to normal service, re-connect the battery BE RETORQUED AT LEAST ONCE EVERY YEAR TO 11.3
to the charger and the load, give an equalizing charge and NEWTON-METERS (100 INCH POUNDS).
return the battery to float operation.
NOTE: Design and/or specifications subject to change
without notice. If questions arise, contact your local
SECTION 18 sales representative for clarification.

18.0 Unit Cleaning


SECTION 20
Periodically clean cell covers with a dry 2” paintbrush to
remove accumulated dust. If any cell parts appear to be damp 20.0 Capacity Testing
with electrolyte or show signs of corrosion, contact your local
GNB representative. When a capacity discharge test is desired, it is recommended
that it be performed in accordance with IEEE-1188*, latest
revision.

CAUTION! An equalizing charge, as described in Section 13.2, must be


completed within 7 days prior to the capacity test. The bat-
Do not clean plastic parts with solvents, teries must be returned to float charging immediately after the
detergents, oils, mineral spirit or spray equalize charge completes. Allow the batteries to float at least
type cleaners as these may cause crazing 72 hours prior to capacity discharge.
or cracking of the plastic materials.
After the capacity discharge has completed, the batteries can
be recharged in the shortest amount of time by following the
equalize charge procedure described in Section 13.2.

*IEEE-1188: Recommended Practice for Maintenance,


Testing, and Replacement of Valve-Regulated Lead-Acid
(VRLA) Batteries for Stationary Applications.

- 21 -
DATE: ABSOLYTE BATTERY MAINTENANCE REPORT
COMPANY: SERIAL NUMBER: PAGE 1 OF
ADDRESS: BATTERY LOCATION / NUMBER:
A Division of Exide Technologies
No. of CELLS: TYPE: MANUF. DATE: INSTALL DATE:
SYSTEM VOLTAGE: TEMPERATURE: CHARGER VOLTAGE: CHARGER CURRENT:
Cell Conn. Ohmic Cell Conn. Ohmic Cell Conn. Ohmic Cell Conn. Ohmic
No. Volts Resist. C / R / I Tem p No. Volts Resist. C / R / I Tem p No. Volts Resist. C / R / I Tem p No. Volts Resist. of Exide
A DivisionC / R Technologies
/ I Temp
1 31 61 91
2 32 62 92
3 33 63 93
4 34 64 94 A Division of Exide Technologies

5 35 65 95
6 36 66 96
7 37 67 97
8 38 68 98
9 39 69 99
10 40 70 100
11 41 71 101
12 42 72 102
13 43 73 103
14 44 74 104

- 22 -
15 45 75 105
16 46 76 106

Figure 25.1
17 47 77 107
18 48 78 108
19 49 79 109
20 50 80 110
21 51 81 111
22 52 82 112
23 53 83 113
24 54 84 114
25 55 85 115
26 56 86 116
27 57 87 117
28 58 88 118
29 59 89 119
30 60 90 120

ADDITIONAL COMMENTS:
DATE: ABSOLYTE BATTERY MAINTENANCE REPORT
COMPANY: SERIAL NUMBER: PAGE 1 OF
ADDRESS: BATTERY LOCATION / NUMBER:
A Division of Exide Technologies
No. of CELLS: TYPE: MANUF. DATE: INSTALL DATE:
SYSTEM VOLTAGE: TEMPERATURE: CHARGER VOLTAGE: CHARGER CURRENT:
Cell Conn. Ohmic Cell Conn. Ohmic Cell Conn. Ohmic Cell Conn. Ohmic
No. Volts Resist. C / R / I Temp No. Volts Resist. C / R / I Temp No. Volts Resist. C / R / I Temp No. Volts A Division of
Resist. CExide
/ RTechnologies
/ I Temp
1 31 61 91
2 32 62 92
3 33 63 93
4 34 64 94 A Division of Exide Technologies

5 35 65 95
6 36 66 96
7 37 67 97
8 38 68 98
9 39 69 99
10 40 70 100
11 41 71 101
12 42 72 102
13 43 73 103

- 23 -
14 44 74 104

Figure 25.2
15 45 75 105
16 46 76 106
17 47 77 107
18 48 78 108
19 49 79 109
20 50 80 110
21 51 81 111
22 52 82 112
23 53 83 113
24 54 84 114
25 55 85 115
26 56 86 116
27 57 87 117
28 58 88 118
29 59 89 119
30 60 90 120

ADDITIONAL COMMENTS:
APPENDIX A
Temperature Corrected Float Voltages
Expressed in Volts per Cell

Float Voltage at 25°C Float Voltage at 77°F


2.23 2.24 2.25 2.26 2.27 2.23 2.24 2.25 2.26 2.27
3 2.35 55 2.30 2.31 2.32 2.33 2.34
4 2.35 2.35 56 2.29 2.30 2.31 2.32 2.33
5 2.34 2.35 57 2.29 2.30 2.31 2.32 2.33
6 2.34 2.35 58 2.29 2.30 2.31 2.32 2.33
7 2.33 2.34 2.35 59 2.28 2.29 2.30 2.31 2.32
8 2.33 2.34 2.35 60 2.28 2.29 2.30 2.31 2.32
9 2.32 2.33 2.34 2.35 61 2.28 2.29 2.30 2.31 2.32
10 2.32 2.33 2.34 2.35 62 2.28 2.29 2.30 2.31 2.32
11 2.31 2.32 2.33 2.34 2.35 63 2.27 2.28 2.29 2.30 2.31
12 2.31 2.32 2.33 2.34 2.35 64 2.27 2.28 2.29 2.30 2.31
13 2.30 2.31 2.32 2.33 2.34 65 2.27 2.28 2.29 2.30 2.31
14 2.30 2.31 2.32 2.33 2.34 66 2.26 2.27 2.28 2.29 2.30
Battery Temperature (°C)

15 2.29 2.30 2.31 2.32 2.33 67 2.26 2.27 2.28 2.29 2.30
16 2.28 2.29 2.30 2.31 2.32 68 2.26 2.27 2.28 2.29 2.30

Battery Temperature (°F)


17 2.28 2.29 2.30 2.31 2.32 69 2.25 2.26 2.27 2.28 2.29
18 2.27 2.28 2.29 2.30 2.31 70 2.25 2.26 2.27 2.28 2.29
19 2.27 2.28 2.29 2.30 2.31 71 2.25 2.26 2.27 2.28 2.29
20 2.26 2.27 2.28 2.29 2.30 72 2.25 2.26 2.27 2.28 2.29
21 2.26 2.27 2.28 2.29 2.30 73 2.24 2.25 2.26 2.27 2.28
22 2.25 2.26 2.27 2.28 2.29 74 2.24 2.25 2.26 2.27 2.28
23 2.25 2.26 2.27 2.28 2.29 75 2.24 2.25 2.26 2.27 2.28
24 2.24 2.25 2.26 2.27 2.28 76 2.23 2.24 2.25 2.26 2.27
25 2.23 2.24 2.25 2.26 2.27 77 2.23 2.24 2.25 2.26 2.27
26 2.23 2.24 2.25 2.26 2.27 78 2.23 2.24 2.25 2.26 2.27
27 2.22 2.23 2.24 2.25 2.26 79 2.22 2.23 2.24 2.25 2.26
28 2.22 2.23 2.24 2.25 2.26 80 2.22 2.23 2.24 2.25 2.26
29 2.21 2.22 2.23 2.24 2.25 81 2.22 2.23 2.24 2.25 2.26
30 2.21 2.22 2.23 2.24 2.25 82 2.22 2.23 2.24 2.25 2.26
31 2.20 2.21 2.22 2.23 2.24 83 2.21 2.22 2.23 2.24 2.25
32 2.20 2.21 2.22 2.23 2.24 84 2.21 2.22 2.23 2.24 2.25
33 2.20 2.21 2.22 2.23 85 2.21 2.22 2.23 2.24 2.25
34 2.20 2.21 2.22 2.23 86 2.20 2.21 2.22 2.23 2.24
35 2.20 2.21 2.22 87 2.20 2.21 2.22 2.23 2.24
36 2.20 2.20 2.21 88 2.21 2.22 2.23 2.24
37 2.20 2.21 89 2.20 2.21 2.22 2.23
38 2.20 90 2.20 2.21 2.22 2.23
39 2.20 91 2.21 2.22 2.23
92 2.21 2.22 2.23
93 2.20 2.21 2.22
94 2.20 2.21 2.22
95 2.21 2.22

- 24 -
- 25 -
APPENDIX C

BONDING & GROUNDING OF BATTERY RACK


INTRODUCTION
1. To insure personnel safety, and equipment protection, operation, and reliability, the battery rack should be connected to the
Common Bonding Network (CBN).

2. E
 lectrical continuity between modules is provided through the use of serrated hardware. If continuity between the horizontal
supports (I-beams) and the bottom module is desired, the use of a grounding kit (GNB P/N: K17ABSGPGRND) is required.
This kit is available through your local GNB representative.

GROUNDING KIT INSTALLATION


1. Each kit consists of the following components:
(2) #6 AWG, 12 in. 90°C cables
(4) “C” shaped beam clamps
(4) 1/4-20 x 0.75 in. bolts
(4) 1/4-20 x 1.00 in. bolts

2. U
 sing (1) 1/4-20 x 1.00 in. bolt per beam clamp, connect (1) beam clamp to the I-beam flange and (1) beam clamp to the back
flange of the module (see Figure 1). Be sure to securely tighten the bolts such that the paint is penetrated (see Figure 2).

3. Attach each end of cable assembly to a beam clamp using (1) 1/4-20 x 0.75 in. bolt per end (see Figure 3). Tighten hardware securely.

4. Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for the second horizontal support (I-beam).

Figure 1: Beam Clamp Installation Figure 2: Adequate Paint Penetration Figure 3: Cable Assembly Installation

CONNECTING TO THE CBN


1. The recommended location for attaching the frame ground is the back “C” channel on the
upper module of the stack (see Figure 4).

Figure 4: R
 ecommended Frame
Ground Location

2. Once the location is determined, it will be necessary to drill (2) holes for the frame ground conductor/lug (installer supplied).
Note, hole size and spacing will be dependent on the lug.

3. Using a grinder, etc., remove the paint from around the holes drilled in Step 2.
Apply a thin film of NO-OX-ID “A” grease to the bare metal and attach the frame ground conductor/lug.

- 26 -
G G G G
G G G G
G G G G
G G G G
G G G G
G G G G
G G G G
G G G G
G G G G

- 27 -
GNB Industrial Power –
The Industry Leader.

SECTION 92.61 2013-09

Installation and Operating

Instructions

®
For

GNB Industrial Power, a division of Exide Technologies, is a


global leader in network power applications including
Based on over 100 years of technological innovation the Network
Power group leads the industry with the most recognized global
ABSOLYTE® GP Batteries
communication/data networks, UPS systems for computers brands such as ABSOLYTE®, GNB® FLOODED CLASSIC®,
and control systems, electrical power generation and MARATHON®, RELAY GEL®, SONNENSCHEIN®, and
distribution systems, as well as a wide range of other SPRINTER®. They have come to symbolize quality, reliability,
industrial standby power applications. With a strong performance and excellence in all the markets served.
manufacturing base in both North America and Europe and a
truly global reach (operations in more than 80 countries) in GNB Industrial Power takes pride in its commitment to a better
sales and service, GNB Industrial Power is best positioned to environment. Its Total Battery Management program, an
satisfy your back up power needs locally as well as all over the integrated approach to manufacturing, distributing and recycling
world. of lead acid batteries, has been developed to ensure a safe and
responsible life cycle for all of its products.

GNB Industrial Power


USA – Tel: 888.898.4462
Canada – Tel: 800.268.2698

www.gnb.com
UL Recognized Component
SECTION 92.61
93.10 2013-09
2010-12 A Division of Exide Technologies A Division of Exide Technologies
.
.
.

ÍÛÎÊ×ÝÛ ‰ ÌÎß×Ò×ÒÙ ‰ ÝÑÒÌßÝÌ ßÜÜÎÛÍÍÛÍ Page 7 / 7 7RA9092GB: Rev.04

NORTH AND SOUTH AMERICA:


GUTOR Electronic LLC
12121 Wickchester Lane, Suite 400
Houston, Texas 77079, USA
P 281 588 2145
F 859 962 4593
gutor-service-us@schneider-electric.com

MIDDLE EAST:

CHAPTER 12
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Villa No.2, Defence Road,St.11,
Behind Gava Hotel,
P.O.Box 29580, Abu Dhabi, U.A.E.
P +971 (0)2 443 89 93
F +971 (0)2 443 89 92
gutor-service-ae@schneider-electric.com

CUSTOMER-SPECIFIC
SAUDI ARABIA:

DOCUMENTATION /
GUTOR Electronic LLC
Middle East Commercial Complex
AL-Khobar 31952
P.O.Box. 79575, Saudi Arabia

DECLARATIONS
P +966 (0)3 864 9667
F +966 (0)3 864 9062
gutor-service-sa@schneider-electric.com

RUSSIA
The GUTOR by Schneider Hotline number is: 8-800-200-6446

Please dial 0 for technical consultation, then the Customer Care Center specialist will connect you
to GUTOR by Schneider engineer.

The hotline is open Monday to Friday 8am – 6 pm (Outside business hours please call our GUTOR
Hotline in Switzerland: +41 56 437 6263)

© GUTOR Electronic LLC CH-5430 Wettingen Switzerland


GUTOR Electronic LLC
Hardstrasse 72-74
5430 Wettingen / Switzerland
P +41 (0)56 437 34 34
F +41 (0)56 437 34 44
www.gutor.com
VAT No.: 101999

DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Client: Volta LLC
1616 Gears Rd
Houston, TX 77067 — U.S.A.
P.O. No.: 48652

Project name: EXTERRAN UPS System

System: UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)


Gutor PxW
Type designation TAG (Item) No. Our Reference No.
Gutor PEW 1030-125/240-EN 30kVA 1φ UPS 1150079001-01…1150079001-02
Gutor PEW 1030-125/240-EN 30kVA 1φ UPS 1150079002-01…1150079002-02

We confirm that the equipment was designed, manufactured and tested according to the
following North-American and International standards :

Safety : ANSI / UL 1778


Components : UL 44, UL 50, UL 198, UL 489, NEMA AB-1
EMC : CFR 47, Part 15, sub-part B; IEC 1000-6-2
Design / Performance : NEMA PE-1, ANSI / IEEE 944

Wettingen, 2015-06-29

Cemal Yilmaz Chuong Nguyen


Quality Assurance Project Engineer

You might also like